# What are Build, Send and Results? https://docs.shout.com/projects/basic-info/build-send-results/ Build, Send and Results encompass the three steps of the project (now called a "form" in the app) creation process — you'll find these as three tabs across the top of the builder whenever you're editing a form. ## Project Building The building stage encompasses the content, structure, and design of your project. Inside Build, a left-hand sidebar splits things into **Form** (your questions and pages), **Theme**, **Settings**, and **Comments**. Below you’ll find a list of everything you can accomplish through this step: - Choose [Question Types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/) - Customize Individual Questions and Settings - Insert [Presentational Items](/build/text-images-and-video/list-of-presentational-items/) - [Add/ Edit Pages](/build/pages/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/) - Apply [Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/about-logic/) ([Default Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/) and [Page Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/)) - Pick [Themes and Appearances](/build/themes/customizing-themes/) from the Theme tab - Leave comments for collaborators on the Comments tab, or [Invite Collaborators](/build/team-collaboration/inviting-collaborators/) to your workspace For more information on this step, feel free to swing by one of your project building guides: - [How to Create a Survey](/build/surveys/how-to-create-a-survey/) - [How to Make a Quiz](/build/quizzes/how-to-make-a-quiz/) - [How to Create a Consent Form](/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/) - [How to Create a Contact Form](/build/questions/contact-form-element/) ## Sending your Project Before any of the options below will collect responses, you need to **Publish** your form (the Publish button sits next to Build/Send/Results, at the top right). Once it's published, [sharing your project](/send/sending-a-project/sharing-your-project/) gives you these options, listed in the order they appear down the Send tab: 1. Get a link (URL) to your project, plus quick social-media Share buttons 2. Grab a QR Code for printing 3. Create a Pop-up or Slideout for your website 4. Embed your project on your website 5. Distribute via Email Invitations (using your [Contacts](/contacts/)) 6. Configure Webhooks to notify another system on each new response 7. JavaScript API for developers ### Generate a link to your Project The ‘simple link’ generator will provide you with a link that can be copied and pasted into URL bars. It is accompanied by a selection of quick sharing methods to your preferred Social Media sites, and a downloadable QR code for print. ### Create a Pop-up or Slideout for your Website This option embeds a button on your website, which presents your project to respondents once clicked. You will also be able to choose how your project appears: slide out from the left (Sidebar Left), slide out from the right (Sidebar Right), or Pop-up. Code will be provided for these options, and advanced users will be able to send through additional information to be displayed in your project (such as a name) or recorded in the background (such as a user ID or tracking reference). ### Embed your Project on your Website This option will embed the project directly into your website, amongst all other content. ### Distribute via Email Send invitations to your project via email, using our servers or your own. Contacts will need to be imported into your [Contacts](/contacts/) list in order for you to use this method of distribution. You can also enable ‘Tracking’ to keep note of which contacts have responded to your project and those that haven’t. ### Webhooks Configure a webhook to have Shout notify another system whenever a new response comes in to your project. ### JavaScript API This option requires a basic knowledge of JavaScript/ coding to be accomplished. This uses the [JavaScript API](/send/sending-a-project/javascript-api/) to pass information through to our servers, which will be linked with each response. ## Analyzing your Results Your project results will be organized into an easy-to-read [Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/) (a "Default Report" is created for you automatically, and you can add more from the Reports panel if you want different views for different audiences). Depending on which question types you’ve inserted, your results will be illustrated as one of several [graph/chart types](/results/your-quick-report/charts-and-graphs/). These include: - Doughnut Chart - Column Graph - Line Graph - Radar Chart - Pie Chart - Star Rating - Ranking Your results will also be presented as a [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/), which contains a breakdown of each answer choice and the percentage of people who selected it. Statistics concerning standard deviation, number of responses, and weighted averages will also be included within this grid. Below you’ll find articles relating to analyzing your results: - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-quiz-results/) You have full control over what data is presented in the report, as question results can be added/removed at your will. You'll also be able to [add elements to your report](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/adding-elements-to-reports/) via the **Add Item** button to improve design or brand it for stakeholders. Available item types are: - Question Data - Heading - Text - Image - [Filter Information](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/declaring-filters-and-comparisons-in-use/) - Campaign Statistics For more information on these points, see [How to Customize your Report](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/changing-report-themes/). Every form also has [Filter and Comparison](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/how-to-filter-and-compare-results/) tools, found under **Filter & Compare** on the Results tab. Filters can be built from a range of sources, including: - Form Question Answers - Calculator formula results - Form Completion - Contact fields, Contact Group, Contact Unsubscribed, Contact Source, Contact Sign Up Date, or Contact Statistics - Campaigns - Form Response Date or Form Response Country These will allow you to filter your results and build a comparison for a clear side-by-side view. You can also [analyze individual results](/results/analyzing-your-results/individual-and-tracked-responses/) in the **Responses** table, or open **Invitations** to see email-campaign status. On Free Online Surveys, Free-plan accounts have limited results access (results are only available for a form's first 14 days, or its first 1,000 responses in a calendar month); on Shout, the 14-day free trial shows up to 20 responses. Upgrading to a paid plan removes those limits — see [Free Accounts and Free Trials](/account/billing/free-accounts-and-free-trials/). You will also be able to [print your results report](/results/printing-and-exporting-results/how-to-print-your-results/), and/or [export them as a PDF/spreadsheet](/results/printing-and-exporting-results/how-to-export-your-results/) using **Export / Print** and the Responses table download icon. --- # Glossary https://docs.shout.com/projects/basic-info/glossary/ **Address Book (Contacts)** Your Contacts list stores all your email contacts, in preparation for the Email Invitations distribution method for your project. "Address Book" was the old name for this — the app and its navigation now call it **Contacts**. **Answer Field** The fields available for answer options. **Answer Option(s)** The answers you have provided for respondents. **Answer Randomization** A method of automatically changing the order of answers for each respondent. **API** This acronym stands for Application Programming Interface: a set of subroutine definitions, protocols, and tools for building application software. This software is used to access the features or data of an operating system, application, or other services. **Average Quiz Score Table** This table summarizes respondent quiz scores, providing data concerning: - Total responses - Average scores - Maximum number of attainable points - Average percentage of people who scored the maximum points **Automatic Numbering** A setting that applies chronological numbering to your questions. **Browser** Programs used to navigate the World Wide Web, e.g. Microsoft Edge, Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox. **Calculator** A project/form type that computes a quote, estimate, or score from a respondent's answers using a formula, then displays the result on an exit page. Selected as the **Form type** when creating a new form, alongside Survey and Quiz. See [How to Create a Custom Calculator](/build/calculators/create-a-custom-calculator/). **Chart** A sheet of information in the form of a table, graph, or diagram. **Question Quick Menu** Provides additional options and settings for questions and results. **Collaborator(s)** Those you choose to invite to contribute to your project. **Comparison(s)** This feature is also referred to as segmenting. Use chart drill-down actions or **Filter & Compare** to compare filtered sets of data side by side. The AI bar can also set up complex comparisons from a description. **Consent Page** The purpose of a consent form is to gain the permission of, or make an agreement with, a respondent. They will also serve as evidence of this permission or agreement. **Contact Form** A Contact Form collects personal information from respondents. This isn't a separate project type — you build it by adding a **Contact Details** question block to a Survey, which can include: - Name - Company/ Job/ Occupation - Address, City/Town, State/Province/ County - Zip Code/ Postcode - Country - Email Address - Phone Number **Contacts** Potential respondent information stored in your Contacts list (previously called the Address Book). **Cookies** Data sent between servers and browsers to identify and track users. **Correlation** The mutual connection, or relationship, between two things. **Custom Field (Contacts)** This space in your Contacts list can be used to store further information on your respondents or to personalize messages in your project. This is only available for the Email Invitations method of distribution. **Custom Score Messages** Customized messages displayed to respondents whilst they’re filling out quizzes. These are usually at the 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% marks. **Dashboard** The Forms dashboard ("All Forms") lists all your existing forms — Surveys, Quizzes, and Calculators — organized into Workspaces and Views (Recent, Surveys, Quizzes, Calculators, Deleted, Shared with me). This is also where you can create a new form, from the "New form" button. **Data** The information gathered from respondents. **Data Table** This feature will present you with the averaged results from all respondents for each question. You will also be provided with a possible three sets of statistics: - Standard Deviation - Responses - Weighted Average **Note**: These statistics will not be provided for all question types, as some answers can’t be analyzed numerically. For more information on any of the above, you can visit the [Data Table article](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/). **Disqualification Page** This term is used when respondents are sent to an Exit Page via a qualification question. **Drag Handle** Appears when you click or hover over, a question in your survey, form, or quiz. This feature does exactly what it says on the tin, allowing you to move the corresponding question to any other place in your project. **Drop-down List** A vertical list of interactable options, that opens when clicked. **Email Tracking \[Tracking\]** A way of tracking respondents who have been invited to complete your project using the Email Invitations method of distribution. **Embed** Incorporating text or code within a file or site. **Exit Pages (Thank You Pages)** These are the last pages that respondents will see before they exit your project. They’re simply a way to thank respondents for their time, and/or inform them of their disqualification. **Export (Project)** Transferring data in a format that can be used by other programs. **Extremes (Scales)** This term refers to the polar ends of scaled question types, e.g. ‘Very Bad’ and ‘Very Good’. **Filter(s)** Used to separate and view specific sets of data in your results. **Font** A set of ‘type’ of one particular style and size. **Form** The current general term for what you build in Shout — a Survey, Quiz, or Calculator (see the Project entry below). To gather personal information from respondents (e.g. a Contact Form/Information Request Form), add a Contact Details question block to a Survey-type form rather than picking a separate project type. **Hidden Field** Used to pipe text into your project, using Querystring or JavaScript API. **Hyperlink** A link from one document to another location, activated by clicking a highlighted word or image. **Image Library** The Image Library stores any photos you’ve uploaded to the site. **Individual Results** A section of Results where you can view a respondent's answers. Open **Responses** in the left rail and select a row. Input Limitation \[See Comment Box article\] Control what type of information participants can input. Toggle between ‘None’ (no Input Limitation), ‘Numeric’ (only numbers can be input), ‘Email’ (only email addresses can be input), and ‘Web Address’ (only URLs can be input). **JavaScript API** A method of embedding your project onto a website. **Label** A classifying name or phrase used to organize your projects. **Locked Questions** Questions that have already gathered results, and therefore cannot be edited without deleting those results. **Likert Scale** Measures experiences and attitudes along a linear scale, e.g. ‘Strongly Disagree’ to ‘Strongly Agree’. **Logic (Question and Page)** The term Logic refers to the way respondents can be directed through your project. This is to say that you can oblige participants to skip certain sections of your project or disqualify them from completing the survey if you have determined that it doesn't concern them. You can also require respondents to give consent use of their information, or request further information in relation to what they have already provided. **Logo** A small symbol, design, or image used by organizations as a form of identification. **Matrix (Matrices)** A set of rows and columns that are treated as a single entity. (Matrices is the plural for matrix.) **Multi-Select (Questions)** Those question types where respondents can select more than one answer. **Multi-Factor Questions** Scaled Question Types, where there is more than one question or scale to consider, relating to the same topic. We provide three types of Multi-Factor question types, they include Matrix (Common Scale), Multi-Factor Scale, and Multi-Factor Opinion Slider. **‘Other’ Answer Option** An ‘Other’ answer option provides respondents with an interactive text box, in which they can provide a customized answer to your question. **Passing Data In/ Out** A term referring to how data is taken from a source and stored with the response data. **Page Description Field** The field available for your page description to be entered. **Page(s)** There are two types of pages available to you in constructing a project; Question Pages and Exit Pages (Thank You Pages). Question Pages store all your questions, whilst Exit Pages are the final destination for respondents and are usually used to thank them for their time. **Page Title Field** The field available for a page title to be entered. **Participant (See Respondent)** People who complete your project. **PDF** A file format for sending documents in the exact style you created them, avoiding format changes that other alternatives may incur changes. **Picture Choice Questions** Question Types that include or concern images. **Points (Quiz)** The value given to each correct answer in quizzes. **Poll** Assessment of public opinion by questioning a target population. These are especially popular in the political sector. Poll is no longer offered as a separate project type when creating a new form — build a poll-style project using the Survey type instead. **Progress Bar** This bar illustrates to respondents how much of the project they have completed so far. It will appear at the very top of your project, and will not be interactable in any way. **Presentational Items (Content Items)** These elements can be used to improve the organization, and visual design, of your project. In the question picker they're grouped under "Content Items" and include: - Heading / Greeting - Paragraph (previously called "Text") - Image - Video **Restart Form Button** has moved — it's now grouped under "Special" question types alongside Consent and File Upload, rather than with the content items above. **Preview** View your survey as a respondent would before you distribute it. **Project** The older name for what's now called a **Form** — the Survey, Quiz, or Calculator you create. You'll still see "project" in a few places, like URLs and some dialog titles. **Querystring** A set of characters used in coding to recover specific information. **Question Field** The field available for question text to be entered. **Question Numbering** The chronological numbering of questions in your project. **Rating Heat Bar** A bar that accompanies the Opinion Scale Question Type. It is used to indicate the positive/ negative ends of the scale and is not interactable. **Report Elements (Customizing Report)** The page items used to customize your Report, added via the **Add Item** button. They include: - Question Data - Heading - Text - Image - Filter Information - Campaign Statistics **Respondent(s)** People who complete your project. **Responses** The answers, and sets of answers, given by respondents. **Results** The final stage of your project, where your Report(s) and respondent data are located. **Question Page** These page types are used to contain your questions. **Question Types** This phrase refers to the selection of available question formats. You can find a full list here. **Quick Report (Report)** The section of your Results that houses all responses to your project, customized using the Report Elements. Every form starts with a "Default Report", and you can add more named reports from the Reports panel for different audiences or purposes — the older name for this whole section was "Quick Report". **Quiz** Tests of knowledge; where answer options are assigned points, and respondents are scored. **Scale** A method by which experiences and opinions can be measured, by assigning weight or value to each segment of the scale. It will consist of two ‘extremes’ that represent either end of the scale. **Script** Lists of commands, implemented by certain programs or engines. **Script Tag** These usually contain scripting statements or direct to external script files. They’re used to define a client-side script. **Send** The distribution step of your project. **Server** A computer, or program, that, manages access to a centralized resource or service in a network. **Sidebar** The interactable menu on the left of the screen. This bar will contain different elements depending on which section of the site you’re on. **Slider** A scaled question with an interactable bar. **SMTP Settings** These are to be used when you wish to use your own servers for sending email invitations for your project. **Social Media** Websites and applications that enable users to create and share content or to participate in social networking. **Source Text (Piping)** The answer text that is piped into a new question or answer space. **Standard Deviation** Quantifies the amount of variation in a data set. A low standard deviation indicates that the data points tend to be close to the mean of the set, while a high standard deviation indicates that the data points are spread out over a wider range of values. **Single-Select (Questions)** Questions where only one answer can be chosen by respondents. **String** A data type used in coding to represent text rather than numbers. They are usually comprised of sets of characters, which can contain spaces and numbers. **Target Population** The specific demographic or group of people you may be tailoring your project towards. They are the main focus of project distribution. **Target text (Piping)** The field to which text is piped. This could be a question or answer field. **Text Formatting** The process of organizing or customizing text. **Textarea Height** The available space (lines) available in text boxes. **Text Piping** The term ‘Text Piping’ refers to the ability to insert information into a section of your project, that has been collected by a previous question or external source. **Text Responses** Responses gathered from Text Box Question Types. In the Report, these responses are not accompanied by a Data Table or Chart. **Theme** These are the available visual designs for your project, picked from the **Theme** tab of the builder. Theme type options include Modern (Recommended), Seasonal (Mixed), Letter (A4), Letter (Top spaced), Bordered, and Hero Header. **Timer (Quizzes)** A time limit that can be applied to quizzes. Any response which is not fully complete before the time limit is up will be automatically submitted. **Top Bar** This is the bar found above your project, it will contain different features depending on where you are on the site. **Tracking Field** These are used to contain information on respondents; First Name, Last Name, Email Address, and Custom Data. **Typeface** A specific design of type. **Unsubscribers** Those who have chosen to unsubscribe from your email list. This means they will be excluded from any future project campaigns. **URL** The address of a web page. **Weighted Average** This average is determined by the importance of individual figures within a data set. The higher percentage of times a number or answer is chosen by respondents, the more influential it becomes in calculating a weighted average. **Workspace** A container that groups related forms together — useful for separating forms by team, client, or project. The Forms dashboard sidebar shows "All Forms", "My Forms", and any Workspaces you belong to, alongside your saved Labels and Views. --- # What Type of Projects Can I Create? https://docs.shout.com/projects/basic-info/project-types/ Create surveys to collect feedback and data, make quizzes with automatic scoring, and build calculators to give respondents a quote or estimate. In the app these are all called **Forms** — "project" is the older name for the same thing, and you'll still see it in a few places (like URLs). Every form you create has a **Form type**: Survey, Quiz, or Calculator, chosen when you set it up (this can't be changed afterwards, so pick the closest fit and start from scratch if you need to switch). You can also build first-class email invitation campaigns to distribute these forms. ## Surveys Choose from over 20 question types to create a survey that collects the feedback you need to drive your business or the data you need to power your research. Survey examples: - Customer Satisfaction - Employee Happiness - 360 Degree Feedback - Net Promoter Score - Qualitative and Quantitative Research If you want a guide on creating and customizing surveys, take a look at the following help doc: - [How to Create a Survey](/build/surveys/how-to-create-a-survey/) ## Collecting Contact Details Contact and consent forms aren't a separate form type any more — build them the same way you'd build a survey, then add a **Contact Details** question block to collect a range of personal information from respondents, including: - Name(s) - Address - Email - Phone number - Company/ Business information Here are some docs to help you build specific forms with our tools: - [How to Create a Contact Form](/build/questions/contact-form-element/) - [How to Create a Consent Form](/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/) - See this article for a list of our [Contact Detail Fields](/build/questions/contact-details-element-types/) If you’re collecting survey data and contact information, but want your form to remain anonymous, you can use our Pseudonymization feature (Build → Settings → Privacy & Security). This will separate survey responses from personally identifiable information (PII) in your reports. ## Quizzes Apply points to a range of question types and put your respondents’ knowledge to the test. Scores are calculated automatically on a dedicated **Score/Marking** exit page, where you can choose to display **Page totals** or **Individual question scores**, and switch on **Feedback text** to personalize the message a quiz taker sees based on their result. Under Build → Settings → Quiz you can also set a **Time Limit** (in minutes — the quiz auto-submits when time is up), and turn on **Answer Feedback** to show whether each answer was correct or incorrect as the respondent goes (single-question navigation mode only), plus a toggle to reveal the correct answer after a wrong one. - [How to Make a Quiz](/build/quizzes/how-to-make-a-quiz/) ## Calculators Build an interactive calculator that turns respondent answers into a computed quote, estimate, or score — handy for pricing tools, eligibility checks, or ROI calculators. Add a formula that references your questions, and show the result (with optional conditional messages) on the exit page. - [How to Create a Custom Calculator](/build/calculators/create-a-custom-calculator/) ### Features and Customization Whichever type of form you choose to create, you will have access to a range of customization settings and features. You can find these options under the **Theme** tab in the side menu of any form builder (see [Customizing Themes](/build/themes/customizing-themes/)). From this tab, you’ll be able to: - Choose a theme and Change Theme Colors - Set Background Images - Change question and title colors - Select a Font ## Email Invitation Campaigns You can also create fully customizable email invitation campaigns for any of the above form types. Go to the **Send** tab of your form, and you'll find **Send email invitations** with everything you need to get started. The email block editor is easy-to-use, but take a look at some of these docs for a little help: - [Send Survey via Email Invitation](/send/sending-a-project/sending-surveys-via-email-invitation/) - [Email Design](/email-builder/) - [Merge Tags](/email-builder/merge-tags/using-merge-tags-in-emails/) Please note, you’ll first need to import contacts to the app before you’re able to send any email invitations: - [Add a Single Contact](/contacts/adding-contacts/add-single-contact/) - [Import Contact Lists](/contacts/adding-contacts/import-contacts/) - [Group Contacts](/contacts/managing-contacts/group-contacts/) --- # Copying a Project https://docs.shout.com/projects/managing-your-projects/copying-a-project/ Copying a project will create an exact duplicate of it within your [Dashboard](/projects/navigation/the-dashboard/). You may want to do this to track major changes in your project creation process or to edit live projects that have accumulated recorded responses. You could also couple this feature with Collaboration, this way your collaborators will only be making changes to a copy of your original project and not the original one. ## To create a copy of your project: 1. Make sure you have at least one existing project 2. Click **Forms** in the top navigation to open your Dashboard 3. Click the project you wish to copy — this expands its actions 4. Select **Copy** 5. A duplicate of your project will appear at the top of your project list The only differences between your project copy and the original will be the name and launch date. The name will be prefixed by "Clone of:", followed by your original project title. You may want to [change the project title](/projects/managing-your-projects/renaming-a-project/) of your new duplicate. **Note**: The launch date will be set to the date you copied the project, not the launch date of the original. --- # Deleting a Project https://docs.shout.com/projects/managing-your-projects/deleting-a-project/ Every form, survey and quiz in Shout is a project, so this is also how you delete those. 1. Go to the [Dashboard](/projects/navigation/the-dashboard/) 2. Click the project you wish to delete — this expands its actions 3. Select **Delete** 4. Confirm by clicking **Delete project** in the dialog that appears (or **Cancel** to back out) Your project will now be moved to the "Deleted" section of your dashboard. It will remain here for a month before it is removed from the Dashboard permanently. ### Restoring a Deleted Project You are able to restore a project within a month of its deletion. 1. Go to the Dashboard 2. Go to the "Deleted" view in the sidebar 3. Click the project you wish to restore to expand its [project menu](/projects/navigation/project-menu/) 4. Click **Restore** You will then find your project fully restored in the position it was before you deleted it. ### Will My Results be Restored with the Project? Yes, your results will be restored along with your project. However, if you cleared your results before deleting the project, they will not be restored. --- # Closing a Project https://docs.shout.com/projects/managing-your-projects/how-to-close-a-project/ Closing a project will disable any further respondents from providing responses. ## Closing a Survey or Quiz 1. Click **Forms** in the top navigation to open your Dashboard 2. Optionally, select **Surveys** or **Quizzes** under Views in the sidebar to filter your list 3. Click the project you'd like to close — this expands its actions 4. Select **Close** 5. Press **Stop Collecting Responses** to confirm, or **Cancel** to back out Once closed, the project is marked **Closed** in your project list, and the **Send** action is disabled until you re-activate it. ![A closed project's expanded panel, showing the Closed status and the Send action disabled](/help-images/how-to-close-a-project/closed-project-panel.png) ## Can a Project Close Itself Automatically? Yes — you can schedule a closing time, a reopening time, or a maximum number of responses instead of closing the project by hand. See [Scheduling a Project to Open or Close Automatically](/projects/managing-your-projects/scheduling-a-project/). ## Can I Re-Open/ Activate a Closed Project? Yes — click the closed project in your Dashboard and select **Activate**. Read more about [How to Re-Activate a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/reactivating-a-project/). ## If I Copy a Project, will it Still be Closed? Yes, any duplicate made of a closed project will also be closed to any respondents. --- # Labelling a Project (Tags) https://docs.shout.com/projects/managing-your-projects/labelling-a-project-tags/ Labels, which are also known as Tags, can be attached to the projects to help organise them. They are useful for when you have accumulated a large number of projects, and are using the search bar to filter them. To apply Labels to a project: 1. Go to the project dashboard 2. Click the project you'd like to add a label to — this expands its actions![](/help-images/labelling-a-project-tags/file-GVuKKL4No3.png) 3. Click **Add Label** 4. Type your label text into the **Search or create label** box (or pick a matching existing label from the list) 5. Press **Enter** to create it and apply it to the project Your Labels will appear below the project name, once you have applied them. ### Removing a Label from a Project 1. Go to the Dashboard and expand the project 2. Click the **X** on the label chip you'd like to remove This only detaches the label from that project — the label itself still exists and can be reused on other projects. ### Deleting a Label Permanently 1. Go to the Dashboard 2. Find the label under **Labels** in the sidebar 3. Click the trash icon next to it 4. Confirm by clicking **Delete** in the dialog that appears **Note**: This removes the label from every project it's applied to, and cannot be undone. --- # Moving a Project to a Workspace https://docs.shout.com/projects/managing-your-projects/moving-a-project-to-a-workspace/ Workspaces let you group your projects by team, rather than by project type. Every account starts with **My Forms** (projects with no workspace) and **All Forms** (everything). You can also create additional workspaces, such as one per team, and move projects between them. ## To move a project to a workspace: 1. Click **Forms** in the top navigation to open your Dashboard 2. Click the project you'd like to move — this expands its actions 3. Select **Move to workspace** 4. Choose a workspace from the list (or click **Create workspace** to make a new one) 5. Click **Move** to confirm, or **Cancel** to back out ![The Move to Workspace dialog, listing available workspaces with a Create workspace option](/help-images/moving-a-project-to-a-workspace/move-to-workspace-dialog.png) Moving a project to a workspace doesn't delete or duplicate it — it simply changes which workspace it's filed under. You can move a project between workspaces as many times as you like. **Note**: Workspaces are separate from [Labels](/projects/managing-your-projects/labelling-a-project-tags/). Labels are lightweight tags for filtering your search; workspaces are a single home for a project, usually mapped to a team. --- # Re-activating a Project https://docs.shout.com/projects/managing-your-projects/reactivating-a-project/ [Closing a project](/projects/managing-your-projects/how-to-close-a-project/) will stop any more respondents from completing your project. However, you will be able to re-activate a project once it's been closed. Follow the instruction below to achieve this: 1. Go to the [Dashboard](/projects/navigation/the-dashboard/) 2. Click the closed project you'd like to re-activate — this expands its actions 3. Select **Activate** ![A closed project's expanded panel, with the Activate action highlighted](/help-images/reactivating-a-project/activate-project-panel.png) Activation happens immediately, with no confirmation step. Once you've done this, the **Send** action for that project will be available again. **Note**: You can close and activate a project as many times as you wish. **Tip**: To reopen a project automatically at a future time — or close it again at a deadline — see [Scheduling a Project to Open or Close Automatically](/projects/managing-your-projects/scheduling-a-project/). --- # Re-naming a Project https://docs.shout.com/projects/managing-your-projects/renaming-a-project/ At some point in your project building process, you may want to change the title of your Survey, Quiz, or Calculator. This may be because you made an error, or the scope of your project has changed, and the name needs to change to encompass that. Whatever the reason, this is a very simple process. ## Change a project's title 1. Click **Forms** in the top navigation to open your Dashboard 2. Optionally, select **Surveys**, **Quizzes**, or **Calculators** under Views in the sidebar to filter your list 3. Click the project you wish to rename — this expands its actions 4. Choose **Rename** 5. Enter a new title into the **New title** field 6. Click **Save** (or **Cancel** to back out) ## Changing an email campaign title Your email invitations are currently named by their purpose (e.g. Email Invitation) + the subject line for that email. For example, Survey Invitation: Customer Feedback Form. You can edit the subject line of a campaign before it is sent out, which will change the title. But you cannot change the title of a campaign without editing the subject line. It's not currently possible to change the title of an email campaign that has already been sent. --- # Restore a Deleted Project https://docs.shout.com/projects/managing-your-projects/restore-a-deleted-project/ Once you've [deleted a survey, quiz, or calculator](/projects/managing-your-projects/deleting-a-project/), you will find that it's been stored in the Deleted view on the [Dashboard](/projects/navigation/the-dashboard/). However, this does not mean that the project is gone forever. It will be kept in the Deleted view for a month, in which time it can be restored. ### Restoring a Deleted Project 1. Go to the Project Dashboard 2. Select **Deleted** under Views in the sidebar![](/help-images/restore-a-deleted-project/file-ftvGIolUMy.png) 3. Click the project you wish to restore — this expands its actions 4. Click **Restore**![](/help-images/restore-a-deleted-project/file-5aPvx9tHAm.png) Restoring happens immediately, with no confirmation step. You will then find your project fully restored in the position it was before you deleted it. **Note**: The Deleted view also has a **Delete** action for permanently removing a project before the month is up — this asks you to confirm, and cannot be undone. ### Will My Results be Restored with the Project? Yes, your results will be restored along with your project. However, if you cleared your results before deleting the project, they will not be restored. --- # How to Save a Survey https://docs.shout.com/projects/managing-your-projects/saving-a-project/ Any time you add a question, customize your form or change a setting, **we automatically save all your work**. There's no manual save button or "saving…" indicator to watch for in the builder — changes are simply saved in the background as you make them. You can safely navigate away, reload the page, or close the tab right after an edit and it will still be there when you come back. ![The form builder's Build tab, where questions and pages are edited and saved automatically](/help-images/saving-a-project/file-3MGoNA0pzS.png) --- # Scheduling a Project to Open or Close Automatically https://docs.shout.com/projects/managing-your-projects/scheduling-a-project/ Scheduling lets a project open and close itself so you don't have to be at your desk. You can combine three automatic triggers: - **Open automatically** — the form starts accepting responses at a date and time you pick - **Close automatically** — the form stops accepting responses at a deadline - **Close after a number of responses** — the form closes once it has collected a maximum number of responses All times are picked in **your local timezone**. ## Setting a Schedule 1. Click **Forms** in the top navigation to open your Dashboard 2. Click the project you'd like to schedule — this expands its actions 3. Select **Schedule** 4. Set an open time, a close time, and/or a maximum number of responses 5. Check the summary at the bottom of the dialog — it spells out exactly what will happen 6. Click **Save schedule** ![The schedule dialog, showing the automatic open and close pickers and the response limit](/help-images/scheduling-a-project/schedule-dialog.png) You can also open the same dialog from the three-dot menu on a form card, or from the form actions menu in the builder toolbar (**Schedule open / close**). Your Dashboard shows a note on any scheduled project — for example **"Opens 18 Aug, 9:00 AM"** or **"Closes at 100 responses"** — so you can see upcoming changes at a glance. ## Scheduling a Launch If you set an **opening time on a form that is currently open**, the form is closed right away and reopens automatically at the time you picked. The dialog makes this explicit: the summary reads **"Closes now · reopens …"** and the save button changes to **Close now & save**. Until the opening time arrives, anyone visiting the form's link sees **"This form isn't open yet"** along with the opening time shown in *their* local timezone — useful for announced launches. You can also schedule a pause window on an open form: set a close time and a later reopen time, and the form stays open, closes at the deadline, and reopens on its own. ## How the Triggers Behave - Each trigger fires **once** and then clears itself. If you manually reopen a form after it auto-closed, it stays open — an old schedule never overrides you. - The response limit counts identified (non-anonymous) responses, matching the response count shown on your Dashboard. Respondents who are already part-way through when the form closes can still finish; only new respondents are blocked. - Scheduled changes take effect within about a minute of the set time. - To remove a trigger, open the Schedule dialog, clear the field, and save. ## Related Articles - [Closing a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/how-to-close-a-project/) - [Reactivating a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/reactivating-a-project/) --- # Main Menu https://docs.shout.com/projects/navigation/main-menu/ The Main Menu is the row of buttons that runs across the top of the app. It stays visible regardless of what stage of project building you've reached or what page you're on. The Menu consists of five sections: - Home - Forms - Mailings - Contacts - Inbox ## Home Your landing page after signing in. It shows a quick overview of your account — responses collected this week, live forms currently collecting, active mailing campaigns, and open inbox tickets — plus a "Happening now" list of your live and recently-edited forms and a summary of your plan usage. Use the **New form** button here to jump straight into creating a survey, quiz, or calculator. ## Forms From here you can create new surveys, quizzes, and calculators, and access all of your historical projects. The panel on the left offers: - **Workspaces**: All Forms, My Forms, and any team workspaces you belong to — a way of grouping projects by team rather than by type - **Views**: Recent, Surveys, Quizzes, Calculators, [Deleted](/projects/managing-your-projects/restore-a-deleted-project/), and Shared with me (projects [shared with you](/account/organizations/how-to-share-projects-with-team-members/) or that you're a collaborator on) - **Labels**: custom labels you've created, for filtering your list Clicking a project opens the [Project Menu](/projects/navigation/project-menu/). ## Mailings From here you can access the email invitations (campaigns) linked to your surveys, forms, and quizzes. Your options include: - All: All campaigns created on the site, ordered chronologically. - Drafts: All emails that have not yet been sent or scheduled. - Outbox: All emails that have been scheduled or due to be sent. - Sent: All sent emails. ## Contacts This is where all your contacts are stored on site. Toggle between **Contacts** and **Organisations**, filter by **Lists** to segment your audience (or view contacts that are Not in a list), and use the search bar to find someone by email or name. The download and add icons let you export contacts or add one manually. ## Inbox Opens your team's shared inbox, where conversations from live chat and email appear as tickets you can view, assign, and reply to. --- # Project Menu https://docs.shout.com/projects/navigation/project-menu/ The Project Menu allows you to perform a number of tasks in relation to your Survey/ Quiz/ Calculator. Clicking a project in [Forms](/projects/navigation/the-dashboard/) expands it in place to reveal this menu (on the Home page, the same options sit behind each card's **Form actions** button). It contains the following options: - Edit - Send - Results - Copy - Rename - Move to Workspace - Close - Activate - Clear Results - Delete ## Edit This button will take you to the builder of the project you selected. Here you will be able to: - [Add Question Types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/) - [Manage your Pages](/build/pages/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/) - [Change Project Themes](/build/themes/customizing-themes/) - Edit Project Settings ([Survey Settings](/build/surveys/survey-settings/)), ([Quiz Settings](/build/quizzes/quiz-settings/)) - [Invite Collaborators](/build/team-collaboration/inviting-collaborators/) For more information on this, you can swing by these articles: - [How to Create a Survey](/build/surveys/how-to-create-a-survey/) - [How to Make a Quiz](/build/quizzes/how-to-make-a-quiz/) - [How to Create a Contact Form](/build/questions/contact-form-element/) - [How to Create a Consent Form](/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/) ## Send Go straight to the Send section of a project, from where you’ll be able to distribute it to potential respondents. Here's how to [share your project](/send/sending-a-project/sharing-your-project/), organized into tabs: 1. Get a link (URL) — the quickest way to share, with options to use a custom domain or customize the URL 2. Share — post a link via email, Facebook, X, LinkedIn, Pinterest, WhatsApp, or Reddit 3. QR Code 4. Pop-ups and slideouts (a button for your website — sidebar left, sidebar right, or pop-up) 5. Embed your Project inline on your website 6. Email invitations — upload contacts or send using your [Address Book](101-about-the-address-book) 7. Webhooks — notify another system when a response comes in 8. JavaScript API (developers only) ## Results Navigate to the [Quick Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/) for your chosen project. Here you will find: - Reports - [Add Item](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/adding-elements-to-reports/) (report elements) - [Filter & Compare](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/how-to-filter-and-compare-results/) - [Print](/results/printing-and-exporting-results/how-to-print-your-results/) - [Export](/results/printing-and-exporting-results/how-to-export-your-results/) See the below tutorials for analyzing results: - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-quiz-results/) ## Copy Use this button to [duplicate your project](/projects/managing-your-projects/copying-a-project/). It creates a "Clone of: ..." copy alongside the original instantly, with no confirmation step. Here’s an article explaining the process and rules of copying. ## Rename Opens a **Rename project** dialog showing the project's current title and a field for the new one. Enter the new [title](/projects/managing-your-projects/renaming-a-project/) and click **Save** (or **Cancel** to back out). ## Move to Workspace Moves the project into one of your team Workspaces (or back to My Forms), so it's grouped with related projects and visible to the right teammates. This is a newer feature — Workspaces sit above the Views panel in Forms. ## Close [Suspend a project](/projects/managing-your-projects/how-to-close-a-project/) using this feature. You'll be asked to confirm — the dialog warns that this will make the project inaccessible to respondents and that collection of results will cease. Respondents will no longer be able to submit responses once this is activated, and the Send option is disabled while a project is closed. Learn how to do this here. ## Activate Once a project is closed, this button takes the place of Close and reactivates it immediately (no confirmation needed), restoring the ability to collect responses and re-enabling Send. ## Clear Results This button will [clear your project results permanently](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/deleting-results/). If you have any concerns over this feature, you can refer to this guide. ## Delete [Deleting a project](/projects/managing-your-projects/deleting-a-project/) will move it to the Deleted view in Forms, with a confirmation noting you can restore it from there for about a month. Deleting it again from the Deleted view is **permanent** and cannot be undone. Read this article for more information on this process. ## Labels Labels are no longer applied from this menu. Click **Add label** directly on a project's card (in the Forms list, or on a Home page card) to [add a Tag/Label](/projects/managing-your-projects/labelling-a-project-tags/) — search existing labels or type a new name and press Enter to create and apply it in one step. --- # The Dashboard https://docs.shout.com/projects/navigation/the-dashboard/ The Project Dashboard contains all your existing projects: Surveys, Quizzes, and Calculators. This is also where you can create a new project. In today's app this area is reached from the **Forms** button in the [Main Menu](/projects/navigation/main-menu/) — the underlying web address still says `dashboard`, but the app labels it "Forms." ## Filtering and Searching your Projects Once you’ve been using the service for a while, you’ll find that you have a long list of created projects. By default, you will see your most recent projects, but you can use the **Views** panel on the left to filter your projects accordingly. - **Recent**: All your projects listed chronologically - **Surveys**: List of all your surveys - **Quizzes**: List of all your quizzes - **Calculators**: List of all your calculators - **Deleted**: List of all your [deleted projects](/projects/managing-your-projects/restore-a-deleted-project/) - **Shared with me**: List of projects that have been shared with you/ you are a collaborator on Above the Views, a **Workspaces** panel lets you switch between All Forms, My Forms, and any team Workspaces you belong to — a way of grouping projects by team rather than by type. Each item in these lists will show: - Send/creation date - Response Count - A control to add a Label ## Searching for Projects Enter keywords into the Search Bar to find specific projects. ## The Project Menu If you click a project in Forms, it expands in place into the Project Menu. This will allow you to: - Edit the project - [Share your Project](/send/sending-a-project/sharing-your-project/) - View Results - [Copy a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/copying-a-project/) - [Rename a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/renaming-a-project/) - Move the project to a different Workspace - [Close a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/how-to-close-a-project/) - [Re-Activate a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/reactivating-a-project/) (the button is labeled **Activate**) - [Delete Project Results](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/deleting-results/) - [Delete a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/deleting-a-project/) See the [Project Menu](/projects/navigation/project-menu/) article for the full rundown of each option, including [labeling a project](/projects/managing-your-projects/labelling-a-project-tags/), which now happens directly on the project's card rather than through this menu. Deleting or Clearing your Project Using the ‘Delete’ option in the Project Menu will shift your project to the Deleted view. After a project is deleted, a confirmation notes it will remain there for about a month, during which it can be restored. It is possible to recover the project at this time, but not after that period has passed. ## Deleted Items If you delete a project whilst it’s already in the Deleted view, a confirmation warns that this is **permanent** and cannot be undone. I.e. You will not be able to recover it. ## Labeling (Tags) a Project You are able to ‘Label’/ ‘Tag’ projects in order to organize them further. You can achieve this by: 1. Clicking **Add label** directly on the project's card (in the Forms list, or on a Home page card) 2. Typing to search your existing labels, or typing a new label name 3. Pressing **Enter** to create the label and apply it in one step ## Suspending a Project By choosing the ‘Close’ option in the Project Menu, you can suspend a survey, quiz, or calculator, after confirming in a dialog. This will stop any respondents from submitting responses for the time in which the project is suspended, and disables the Send option. When attempting to respond to a suspended project, respondents will be shown a message informing them that it has been closed. You can also re-open/ re-activate a project using the same process as above; the ‘Close’ button will have been replaced with an ‘Activate’ button, which takes effect immediately with no confirmation needed. --- # Add a Single Contact https://docs.shout.com/contacts/adding-contacts/add-single-contact/ If you've gained permission to add a contact to your list, you can manually add them individually rather than using the import tool. ## Add a single contact manually 1. Go to **Contacts** in the top navigation. 2. Click the **+** icon above the contact list, then select **New contact**. 3. Enter the contact's **Email address** (required), plus any other details you have — first/last name, phone number, address, and so on. 4. Under **Groups**, select the group(s) you'd like to add them to. 5. When you're done, click **Save**. ![The New contact form, showing the Email address, First name, Last name and other detail fields, plus the Groups selector](/help-images/add-single-contact/new-contact-form.png) If a contact with that email address already exists in your list, saving will update their existing record rather than create a duplicate. You must have gained explicit consent from a contact before adding them to your list. To add multiple contacts at the same time, use [Import Contacts to the CRM](/contacts/adding-contacts/import-contacts/) instead. --- # Collect Contacts with a Form https://docs.shout.com/contacts/adding-contacts/collect-contacts-with-a-form/ You can use **Contact Details** questions in your forms to add contacts to your list and update their information. :::note **Jump to:** - [How to add contacts to your list using a form](#contact-form) - [Changing the linked contact field](#change-fields) - [Updating contact details using a form](#update) - [Rules for collecting contacts with a form](#rules) ::: ## How to add contacts to your list using a form To get started, you'll need to create your form. ### Creating a form 1. Go to **Forms** in the top navigation, then click **New form**. 2. Choose **Start from scratch** (or a template). 3. Give your form a name, choose a **Form type** (Survey, Quiz, or Calculator) and how many **Questions per page** you'd like, then click **Create form**. This opens the builder. 4. In the **Form** tab, click **+ Question**. 5. Under **Contact Details**, select a question type — for example **Compact Contact Form** (a bundled block with name, email, company, phone and address fields) or an individual field like **Full Name** or **Email address**. ![The Contact Details category in the + Question picker, showing Address Lookup, Compact Contact Form, Full Name, Telephone number and Email address options](/help-images/collect-contacts-with-a-form/contact-details-picker.png) Contact Details questions always update the contact record and prefill known details for a respondent — there's no separate step to "link" the question to your contact list, and no group-selection step when you create the form. Each response that includes an email address automatically creates or looks up a contact and adds them to the **Form Sign-Ups** group. Each field in a Contact Details question shows a small icon next to it — this denotes which contact field it's linked to. ![A Compact Contact Form question in the builder, with each field showing an arrow icon linking it to a contact field (First Name, Last name, Email address, Company, Phone number, Zip / Post Code, Address Line 1/2, City / Town, State / Province, Country)](/help-images/collect-contacts-with-a-form/compact-contact-form-question.png) Hover your mouse over this icon to view which contact field is currently linked (for example, *"This response updates the contact profile ('Company'), not just form results."*). ### Changing the linked contact field To switch what contact field a question (or a field within a **Compact Contact Form**) is linked to: 1. Click the small link icon next to the field. 2. In the **Link to contact detail** menu, open the dropdown. 3. Select an alternate field, or **Not linked** to stop it updating the contact record. Fields already linked elsewhere on the same form are greyed out ("Used in another question"). You can also click **Manage contact fields** from this menu to review your account's contact fields. You'll also want to change the corresponding form field's label if you switch the linked field — click the field's text and edit it directly. If the email address a respondent enters already exists in your list, their existing contact record is **not** updated by a plain form submission — see [Rules](#rules) below. ## Updating contact details using a form To update the information of a contact that's already stored in your list, distribute the form via email invitations with tracking enabled, rather than sharing the generic form link. 1. Publish your form, then go to its **Send** tab. 2. Under **Send email invitations**, click **Send by email**. 3. Fill out the **Subject**, **From name**, **Reply email** and **Physical address**. 4. Under **Invitation tracking**, make sure **Enable tracking** is checked (it's on by default). This links each response to the respondent's CRM profile — but note that once tracking is enabled, responses are no longer anonymous. 5. Click **Next: Content** to design your email. 6. Choose which contacts or groups to send to. 7. Schedule and send. When your existing contacts follow their tracked link and fill out the form, the information in their profile is updated. ## Rules for adding contacts via a form There are a few rules you'll want to keep in mind when using forms to collect contact data. **Rule #1: Each contact field can only be linked once per form.** If you link, say, Email address to one question, it won't be offered again for another question on the same form — so a single response can only update one set of contact details. **Rule #2: If an email address already exists in your list, a plain form submission will not update it.** Submitting the generic form link with an email address that's already in your list creates a contact the first time, but a later submission with the same email address won't overwrite their existing details. **Rule #3: Contact profiles are only updated when tracking is enabled.** If you already have a contact stored, they won't be able to update their information using the generic, untracked form link — you'll need to distribute the form as a tracked email invitation (see [Updating contact details using a form](#update)) for existing contacts to update their own details. **Rule #4: An email address is what identifies a contact.** Without an email address question (or a tracked invitation identifying the respondent), a response won't be tied to a contact record. --- # Import Contacts to the CRM https://docs.shout.com/contacts/adding-contacts/import-contacts/ Before you're able to send email invitations, you'll need to add contacts. :::note #### In this article... - [Add contacts](#add) - [Group contacts](#group) - [Edit contacts](#edit) ::: ## Add contacts To import contacts to your list: 1. Go to **Contacts** in the top navigation. 2. Click the **+** icon above the contact list. 3. Select **Bulk import**. 4. Paste your list of contacts into the **Paste Your List** field (along with any [custom fields](#custom)). With **Import on paste** ticked (the default), this starts the import automatically as soon as you paste. 5. Click **Import contacts**. 6. Under **Select groups**, choose which group(s) you'd like to add these contacts to (or click **Create new group**). 7. Under **Match Fields**, use the dropdown above each column to match it to the correct field in Shout. ![The Select groups and Match Fields step of the contact importer, showing dropdowns mapping the pasted columns to Email, First and Last name](/help-images/import-contacts/import-match-fields.png) 8. Click **Done**. You'll see a summary showing **New contacts added**, **Contacts updated**, and **Contacts not added**. Duplicates are removed automatically — if you import a contact whose email address already exists in your list, their existing record is updated rather than duplicated. :::note Looking for the legacy **Address Book** importer? That one-time migration is long finished and has been retired — any contacts you had there already live in this contact list, so there's nothing left to bring over. ::: ### Custom fields When importing contacts, you can add more information than just an email address. Format your pasted list like this, with one contact per line: _Email | First name | Last name | ..._ In the **Match Fields** step, match each extra column to one of the following: - First name - Last name - Company - Address Line 1 - Address Line 2 - City / Town - State / Province - Zip / Post Code - Country - Phone number - Language - Net Promoter Score You must ensure that when you paste contacts, the columns are in the same order for every contact in the list. ## Group contacts To create a group: 1. Go to **Contacts** in the top navigation. 2. Click the **List** dropdown near the search bar (it reads "List All" by default). 3. Click **New list**. 4. Enter a **Group name**. 5. In the **Lawful basis of processing** dropdown, select a lawful basis for the processing of this group's data. This defaults to **No consent**. 6. Add a **Full description** for the group _(optional)_. 7. Click **Save**. The **Lawful basis of processing** dropdown gives you the different legal bases for processing data under GDPR (No consent, Explicit consent, Contract, Legal obligation, Vital interests, Public task, Legitimate interests), so you can group your contacts accordingly for easy review and reference. Don't worry, you can add contacts to multiple groups. For example, if you have a list of Newsletter Subscribers, you can create a group for these but also add them to an Explicit Consent group. The Newsletter Subscribers group can act as an active list that serves a specific purpose, whereas the Explicit Consent group acts as a master list of consent-based contacts from all other groups. Once you've uploaded and grouped contacts you can use segments to further personalize your lists. ## Edit contacts You can edit contact information after they've been added. To do this: 1. Go to **Contacts**. 2. Find your contact using the search bar. 3. Click the contact (this opens their profile). 4. On the **Overview** tab, click the pencil icon next to the field you want to change — name, email, phone number, or organisation. 5. Update the value and press **Enter** to save. Open the **Details** tab on the contact's profile to see their full set of fields, and click the group chip (for example **Marketing**) to add or remove them from groups via the **Select groups for contact** dialog. --- # Migrate Contacts from Your Address Book https://docs.shout.com/contacts/adding-contacts/migrate-contacts-from-your-address-book/ The Address Book feature has now been grandfathered and replaced with a new and improved Contact Management System. But don't worry, we've kept all your contacts safe. If you previously had contacts uploaded to your Address Book, you can import these over to the new contact system. ## How to migrate contacts from your Address Book to the new Contact Management System: 1. Go to Contacts 2. Select Import Contacts 3. Click Import contacts from the old 4. Agree to the below terms - If you're using the 'custom' field of the old contact system. You should first create the field in the new system to contain this data. - To put your contacts into a group, you will first need to create a group in the new system. 1. Choose a source list 2. Select a target custom field to link your existing custom field to 3. Select a group to move these contacts into 4. Select Import Contacts ![](/help-images/migrate-contacts-from-your-address-book/file-AnWJlulvUB.png) --- # About Contact Profile Pages https://docs.shout.com/contacts/managing-contacts/contact-profile-pages/ Each of your contacts has an individual profile that contains all available data about a person. From their profile you're also able to: - Edit their information - Change the Lists they are a part of - View their activity, stats and engagement - Unsubscribe, resubscribe or delete them ## Finding a contact's profile You can access profiles by clicking a contact's name in your Contact list. You can use the search tool to locate individual contacts or open a List/Segment to narrow your list down first. To find a contact profile: 1. Go to **Contacts![](/help-images/contact-profile-pages/file-dmWMcWHGBs.png)** 2. Use the search bar to find a contact, or pick a List from the **List** dropdown 3. Click a contact's name in the list ## Contact information ![](/help-images/contact-profile-pages/file-59rYzbxpz3.png) At the top of the profile you'll see: | Information | Description | | --- | --- | | Name | Click the pencil icon next to it to edit inline. | | Verified badge | Shown when the contact has confirmed their identity (for example via a verified live chat session). | | Email address | Editable inline. | | Phone number | Shows "No phone" if none is on file. | | Organisation | The company this contact is linked to, if any. | Click the **⋮** (more actions) icon in this card to **Send Message**, **Unsubscribe**/**Subscribe**, **Manage list membership**, or **Delete** the contact. ## Contact data The Overview tab shows a **Stats** panel (surveys completed, invitations sent, form payments), an **Engagement Score** out of 100, and an **NPS® Score** gauge. ![](/help-images/contact-profile-pages/file-bHjNCpANrf.png) ## Lists You can view the Lists this contact belongs to from the **Details** tab, and add or remove them from lists via the **⋮** menu. ### Add or remove contacts from lists Open the **⋮** icon on the contact's profile and select **Manage list membership** to open the selector below. Choose one or more lists, then click **Done**. ![](/help-images/contact-profile-pages/file-Xgf2SAFfha.png) ![](/help-images/contact-profile-pages/file-ek9Q76wrzs.png) ## Contact details Switch to the **Details** tab to see all of your contact's fields: email address, first/last name, WhatsApp phone number, company, address fields, phone number, language and NPS®. There's no separate edit mode — click into any field and change it directly; changes save automatically as you tab out or move on. Use **+ Attribute** to add a custom field, or **Manage attributes** to edit/delete existing ones. ![](/help-images/contact-profile-pages/file-iy168UMVJY.png) ## Activity feed The Overview tab's Activity feed displays a timeline of events related to a contact (contact created, added to a list, updates, messages sent, and so on), grouped by day. Use the **All activity** dropdown to filter the feed. ![](/help-images/contact-profile-pages/file-yiq9nNdybm.png) --- # Delete Contact Groups https://docs.shout.com/contacts/managing-contacts/delete-contact-groups/ Contact groups are labelled **Lists** in the Contacts area of the app. To delete a list: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Click the **List** dropdown at the top of the Contact list 3. Hover over the list you want to delete and click the delete (trash) icon that appears next to it 4. Confirm by clicking **Delete group** in the dialog Deleting a list will not delete the contacts — they will still remain in the Contacts section. --- # Delete Contacts https://docs.shout.com/contacts/managing-contacts/delete-contacts/ Deleting a contact will permanently remove them from your list, including any tracked survey/form links. Note: We recommend you export your list before performing any bulk actions, as anything you delete in the app will be permanently removed and can't be recovered. ## Delete contacts There are two ways you can delete contacts from your list. You can go directly to the profile of an individual contact or delete contacts in bulk from your list. ### Deleting contacts individually To delete an individual contact: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Use the search bar to locate the contact 3. Click their name to open their contact profile 4. Click the **⋮** (more actions) icon in the top-right of the profile card 5. Select **Delete** 6. Confirm by clicking **DELETE CONTACT** ### Deleting contacts in bulk To delete multiple contacts at once: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Check the boxes of multiple contacts you want to delete 3. Click **Actions** at the top of the list 4. Select **Delete** 5. Confirm the deletion --- # How to Group Contacts https://docs.shout.com/contacts/managing-contacts/group-contacts/ Organizing your contacts into groups — called **Lists** in the Contacts area of the app — is an ideal method of creating targeted surveys and campaigns. ## Creating Lists To create a list: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Click the **List** dropdown at the top of the Contact list 3. Click **New list** 4. Give it a name (**Group name**) 5. Select a **Lawful basis of processing** (No consent, Explicit consent, Contract, Legal obligation, Vital interests, Public task, or Legitimate interests) 6. Give it a description (optional) 7. Click **Save** Note: It's not possible to change the lawful basis of processing for a list after it's been created. ### Edit a list To edit an existing list: 1. Click the **List** dropdown 2. Hover over the list and click the edit (pencil) icon that appears next to it 3. Change the name or description 4. Click **Save** ## Adding Contacts to a list If you don't have any contacts yet, click the **+** icon and select **New contact** or **Bulk import**. You can assign a contact to one or more lists directly from the **New contact** form. To add existing contacts to a list: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Check the boxes next to one or multiple contacts 3. At the top of the list, select **Actions** 4. Select **Add to group** 5. Open the **Select Group** dropdown to choose an existing list 6. Click **Done** ## Removing Contacts from a list To remove contacts from a list: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Check the boxes next to one or multiple contacts (you can do this from the **All** list or from within a specific list) 3. Select **Actions** at the top of the list 4. Select **Remove from group** 5. Open the **Select Group** dropdown and choose the list you want to remove them from 6. Click **Remove Contacts** If you want to remove a contact from multiple lists at once, you can instead visit their Contact Profile, open the **⋮** menu, and choose **Manage list membership**. Removing contacts from single or multiple lists will not delete them — they will still remain in the Contacts section. ## Deleting Lists To delete a list: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Click the **List** dropdown 3. Hover over the list you want to delete and click the delete (trash) icon that appears next to it 4. Confirm by clicking **Delete group** Deleting a list will not delete the contacts — they will still remain in the Contacts section. --- # Manage Custom Fields https://docs.shout.com/contacts/managing-contacts/manage-custom-fields/ Custom fields are called **Attributes** in the app. They're where you can store additional data about your contacts. You can view them from your Contact list, or from the **Details** tab of an individual contact profile. When adding a new contact manually, there are fourteen default fields. Only the email field is required, all others are optional. - Email address - First name - Last name - WhatsApp phone number - Company - Address Line 1 - Address Line 2 - City/Town - State/Province - Zip/Post Code - Country - Phone number - Language - NPS® ## Create new custom fields (Attributes) You can create your own attributes to personalize the information you hold on your contacts. For example: birthday, employee ID, hobbies, interests, subscription plan, customer type, etc. To create a new attribute: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Click the **+ Attribute** button in the column header of the Contact list (or open a contact profile, go to the **Details** tab and click **Manage attributes**, then **+ Attribute**) 3. Enter an **Attribute label** 4. Choose a **Type of attribute** from the dropdown 5. Optionally add a description (used as context for AI translation) 6. Click **Save** :::note The type of attribute determines what data can be entered into the field. There are five types to choose from: **Text**, **Number**, **Date**, **Choose One (Radio/Dropdown)**, and **Choose Any (Checkboxes/Multi-select)**. ::: Once you create a new attribute it's available on every contact's **Details** tab. Each attribute also gets an auto-generated reference shown in the create/edit form — this is the merge tag you use to personalize emails and messages with the contact's data, for example `${birthday}` or `${employee-id}`. ## Show custom fields in your Contact List The Contact list shows an extra column next to **Lists** for a contact attribute (First Name, by default). Click the **+ Attribute** button in that column's header to create a new attribute — it's added to the pool of fields available across the account. ## Deleting custom fields (Attributes) 1. Go to **Contacts** and open any contact's profile 2. Go to the **Details** tab and click **Manage attributes** 3. Find the attribute you want to remove and click its delete (trash) icon — the built-in default fields have this icon disabled and can't be deleted 4. Confirm by clicking **Delete** :::caution Deleting an attribute is permanent and will remove it — and the data it holds — from every contact. This cannot be undone. ::: --- # Searching for Contacts https://docs.shout.com/contacts/managing-contacts/searching-for-contacts/ If your list of contacts has grown substantially, it can be a chore to scroll through them all in search of one contact. The **Search by email or name** field on the Contacts page will filter your list live as you type. To search for a contact: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Click the **Search by email or name** field 3. Enter an email address or name The Contact list filters immediately as you type — there's no separate step to apply the search. You can narrow results further by first opening a specific List, Segment, or Status (Active contacts/Unsubscribed/Bounced/Spam complaints/All contacts) — the search box then only searches within that view. ## How to go back to the Full Contact List If you wish to clear your search and return to the full contact list: 1. Click the **×** (close) icon inside the search field This clears the search immediately — no page refresh needed. --- # Segmenting Contacts https://docs.shout.com/contacts/managing-contacts/segmenting-contacts/ You can use contact details and campaign/form information to filter contacts into segments — saved filters you can revisit at any time. You can choose a single filter or combine multiple filters using AND/OR logic. ## How to segment contacts 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Click the **Active contacts** (Status) dropdown at the top of the list 3. Under **Segments (Saved filters)**, click **New** 4. Name your segment and click **Save** You'll be taken to the segment's own page with a **Segment filter** builder. ![](/help-images/segmenting-contacts/file-rSEBYMCiFE.png) 5. Click the **Filter by** dropdown and choose a filter category 6. Set the operator and value using the dropdowns that appear next to it 7. Click **+ or** underneath a rule to add another condition to the same group (matches if **any** condition in the group is true) 8. Click **+ and** at the bottom of the filter to add a new rule group (a contact must match **every** group to be included) 9. Click **Refresh** to apply your filter and see matching contacts in the list below ![](/help-images/segmenting-contacts/file-yqNaAzg6zy.png) You can rename or delete the segment at any time using the **Rename segment** / **Delete segment** buttons at the top of the page. You can also build a filter first — without saving it as a segment — using **Advanced** in the same Status dropdown, then click **Save filter as segment** once you're happy with it. Below, we'll go over the different filters you can use. ## Available filters | Filters | Description | | --- | --- | | [Contact fields](#fields) | Filter by the contact's own fields (name, address, etc). | | [Contact Group](#group) | Filter by any of your existing Lists (still called "groups" internally). | | [Contact Unsubscribed](#unsubscribed) | Filter by contacts who've unsubscribed from your mailings. | | [Contact Source](#source) | Filter by the source contacts used to subscribe to your list. | | [Contact Sign Up Date](#sign-up-date) | Filter by the date contacts subscribed or were uploaded. | | [Campaigns](#campaigns) | Filter by campaigns sent to contacts. | | [Contact Statistics](#statistics) | Filter by email performance statistics, such as Opens, Clicks, Open Rate, Click Rate, and Emails Sent. | | [Form Question Answers](#survey-question) | Choose a survey/form and filter by questions. | | [Form Completion](#survey-completion) | Choose a survey/form and filter by completed or not completed. | | [Form Response Date](#survey-response-date) | Choose a survey/form and filter by a date range. | | [Form Response Country](#survey-response-country) | Choose a survey/form and filter by any country. | | Calculator formula results | Filter by the result of a calculator-type form's formula. | ### Contact fields Create a segment based on the contact's own data fields. | Parameters | Operators | Action | | --- | --- | --- | | - First Name
- Last Name
- Email
- Company
- Address Line 1
- Address Line 2
- City/Town
- State/Province
- Zip/Post Code
- Country
- Phone number
- Language
- Net Promoter Score | - equals
- contains
- starts with
- ends with | Insert search text. | ### Contact Group Segment contacts based on the Lists they are/aren't a part of. | Operators | Action | | --- | --- | | - in
- not in
- in all
- not in any | Choose a list from the list. | ### Contact Unsubscribed Easily identify who has unsubscribed from your list. | Parameters | Operators | | --- | --- | | Unsubscribed | - Is
- Is not | ### Contact Source Segment contacts based on how they were sourced. This allows you to identify which source produces the contacts who have the highest engagement rates. | Parameters | Operators | | | --- | --- | --- | | - Added manually
- Imported
- API
- Webform | - Is
- Is not | ### Contact Sign Up Date Create a segment based on the date contacts were added to your list. | Operators | Action | | --- | --- | | - Equals (=)
- More than (>)
- Less than (<)
- More than or equal to (>=)
- Less than or equal to (<=) | Input a date. | ### Campaigns Segment contacts based on whether they were sent a specific campaign, whether they opened that campaign and whether they clicked a link. Using the AND/OR logic, you can identify contacts who were sent or engaged with a number of different campaigns. | Operator | Action | | --- | --- | | - Was sent
- Was not sent
- Responded to survey
- Did not respond to survey
- Was opened
- Was not opened
- Was clicked
- Was not clicked | Select a campaign from the list. | ### Contact Statistics Create segments based on the average engagement rates and received campaigns of your campaigns. This filter allows you to easily identify your most and least loyal contacts. | Parameter | Operator | Action | | --- | --- | --- | | - Emails opened
- Emails clicked
- Open rate
- Click rate
- Emails sent | - Equals (=)
- More than (>)
- Less than (<)
- More than or equal to (>=)
- Less than or equal to (<=) | Input a numerical variable. | ### Form Question Answers Use questions from a survey or form to segment your contacts. | Options | Action | | --- | --- | | Any survey, quiz, or form | Select a question from the list. | ### Form Completion Segment contacts based on whether they have completed one or more of your surveys/forms. | Options | Operators | | --- | --- | | Any survey, quiz, or form | Completed
Not completed | ### Form Response Date Segment contacts based on the date of survey/form responses. | Options | Action | | --- | --- | | Any survey, quiz, or form | Input a date range (start date and end date) | ### Form Response Country Use the country of survey/form respondents to create segments. | Options | Action | | --- | --- | | Any survey, quiz, or form | Select a country from the list. | --- # Unsubscribed and Bounced Contacts https://docs.shout.com/contacts/managing-contacts/unsubscribed-and-bounced-contacts/ You may find that some of your contacts are marked as unsubscribed, bounced, or flagged for spam complaints in Contacts. ![](/help-images/unsubscribed-and-bounced-contacts/file-mQlkTPUIzL.png) ## Unsubscribed contacts We require that all emails you create contain an unsubscribe link so that contacts can opt-out of your mailings. Once a contact clicks this link, they will be labeled as unsubscribed and you will no longer be able to send them emails. ### Finding unsubscribed contacts To get a list of all your unsubscribed contacts: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Click the **Active contacts** dropdown at the top of the list 3. Select **Unsubscribed** ### Resubscribing contacts To resubscribe a contact, so you can start sending them campaigns again, just: 1. Follow the steps above to find your unsubscribed contacts 2. Click the contact you wish to resubscribe (this will take you to their contact profile) 3. Click the **⋮** (more actions) icon on their profile card and select **Subscribe** 4. Confirm the resubscription :::caution You should have explicit, documented permission from subscribers that you are resubscribing. ::: There's no way to bulk resubscribe contacts. ## Bounced contacts Hard bounces occur when there is a permanent reason that emails can't be delivered to an address. These most commonly occur when: - There is a typo in the email address - The email address does not exist - The receiving server has blocked emails from our domain or your address :::caution We actively monitor the number of bounces that occur from campaigns and accounts. If your bounce rates are higher than the average, we may suspend your access to mailing features. ::: ### Finding bounced contacts To get a list of all your bounced contacts: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Click the **Active contacts** dropdown at the top of the list 3. Select **Bounced** ## Spam complaints Contacts who report one of your emails as spam are also tracked separately. To find them: 1. Go to **Contacts** 2. Click the **Active contacts** dropdown at the top of the list 3. Select **Spam complaints** If you want to keep any of these filtered lists, click **Advanced** in the same dropdown to open the filter builder, then **Save filter as segment**. Give it a name and you'll be able to access this list from the **Segments (Saved filters)** section of the same dropdown at any time. --- # Age Question https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/age/ The Age question type allows you to collect a respondents age as a numeric value.![Age Question Type](/help-images/age/file-0LOgDzwS9p.png) ## Age Question Settings ![Age Question Settings](/help-images/age/file-121nSlQY7y.png) - **Required**: Require respondents to answer this question before submitting a response. - **Number Type**: Switch the accepted input values between Integer (whole number), Decimal and Currency. - **Min Value**: Set a minimum value that can be entered. - **Max Value**: Set a maximum value that can be entered. - **Prefix**: Add a word, letter, number or symbol to appear before the input value. - **Suffix**: Add a word, letter, number or symbol to appear after the input value. - **Personal Info**: Mark a question to be stored separately from other response data (see: [Pseudonymization](/build/surveys/pseudonymization/)). - **Numbered**: Enable/disable the question numbering. ## Age Results ![Age Question Results](/help-images/age/file-2xRusExU0M.png)The below data will be available for Age question types: - **Average**: The average value of all respondent inputs. - **Min**: The smallest value input. - **Max**: The largest value input. - **Response count**: The total number of responses for this question. - **Numeric responses**: A list of all individual answers (displayed below aggregated data). --- # How to Build a Formula https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/build-a-formula/ Once you've added questions to your calculator, you can start building a formula. To make this as clear as possible we'll build an formula based on an example of a pricing quote calculator. To create a calculator formula, you must first navigate to your **Calculator result** exit page and click "Add new result": ![Build Formulas For Web Calculators](/help-images/build-a-formula/file-U7nZulVQYZ.png) :::tip **Pro Tip**: You don't have to wait until the exit page — click the **calculate** icon in any question's toolbar and turn on **Show result on page** to add a result panel that updates live alongside that question, before turning it into a formula the same way as below. ::: ### 1\. Formula Setup After you've clicked "Add new result", a popup dialogue will appear where you can give name and description to your formula. ![How To Create A Calculator Formula](/help-images/build-a-formula/file-A8DQmOytRb.png) - Heading: Text in this field will act as the title for the results section. For our example, this will be "Total Cost". - Description: A field for you to add additional information regarding the results. For our example, this will read "Totals may differ from final quote dependant on tax". - Select Image: Import an image to display alongside this result, e.g. a logo. - Add CTA / Button to result: Toggle this on to add a button below this result that sends those who click it to an external URL, e.g. your website. ### 2\. Create a new formula To find the formula builder, click the + icon at the top of the popup (or choose "Create a new formula" from the **Select a formula** dropdown): ![Create A Formula](/help-images/build-a-formula/file-iFTEcseWPv.png) The formula builder will then appear: ![Simple Formula Builder](/help-images/build-a-formula/file-Ld84rug4vy.png) We recommend giving your formula a unique name, so you can easily identify it when choosing which results to show: ![Name Your Formula](/help-images/build-a-formula/file-HYBsRzeHTv.png) By default, all questions that can be used in your formula will be present. To add questions into your formula, you can drag and drop them in from the Question data section on the left: ![Drag And Drop Formula Creator](/help-images/build-a-formula/file-Yl0F6EIDCN.png) In our example Price Quote Calculator, we have two questions: 1. What plan are you interested in subscribing to? 2. How many seats would you like to add to your subscription? So, for the purposes of this example we want to add the cost of the subscription and the cost of individual seats up. Our first question is a multiple-choice, where value can be assigned to individual answers: ![Give Values To Calculator Questions](/help-images/build-a-formula/file-OU2dgnBMw0.png) Our second question is a Numeric Slider, where the values are set as the numbers along that slider (e.g. 0-10). ![Slider Calculator Questions](/help-images/build-a-formula/file-5RP6o2Tn65.png) So, we need to define the cost of the "seats" in our formula. Let's say we want to price it at $50 per seat, we'd build this formula: Q\_????+(Q????\*50) ![Calculate Values With Custom Formulas](/help-images/build-a-formula/file-vXoSjYZRx1.png) Prefer working in a spreadsheet-style grid? Switch to the **Excel table** tab next to **Simple** to build the same formula in table form. Make sure to hit "Save Changes". :::tip **Pro Tip**: You'll also see above that if you add test values into the corresponding fields on the left, we'll calculate a test results for you at the bottom of the formula builder. ::: --- # Calculator Question Types https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/calculator-question-types/ When creating a calculator, you can use a wide range of question types as part of your formula. In the question type picker, open the **Highlight compatible** filter and select **Calculator value** — this highlights every question type below that returns a value your formula can use. Here's a full list of those question types: ## Numeric question type Decimal, Integer, and Currency are no longer separate cards in the question picker — they're all **Number types** of a single unified **Number / Money** question. Add a **Number / Money** question, then open **Show more settings** and set **Number type** to: - **Integer** — respondents can input a whole number. ![Integer number type, as it appears to a respondent](/help-images/calculator-question-types/file-cq7WZAnqyY.png) - **Decimal** — respondents can input a decimal value, with a configurable number of decimal places (0-4). ![Decimal number type, as it appears to a respondent](/help-images/calculator-question-types/file-6EFmr7VIK1.png) - **Currency** — respondents can input a monetary value; the currency symbol can be manually selected from a long list, or set to **Auto detect**. Decimal places are configurable here too. ![Currency number type, as it appears to a respondent](/help-images/calculator-question-types/file-qrK2UXgynj.png) ![Currency number type with decimal places enabled](/help-images/calculator-question-types/file-NUsGOVVITV.png) There is no dedicated **Age** number type or question card anymore — see [Age Question](/build/calculators/age/). A separate **Numeric Slider** question type is also available and works in formulas the same way. ## Standard question types We'll provide a list of all other question types that can be used with the calculator below. For more information on these question types, take a look at our [list of all question types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/). - Multi-Choice (Single Select) - Multi-Choice (Multi Select) - Opinion Scale - Opinion Slider - Binary Yes/No - Net Promoter Score® - Star Rating - Drop Down List — this single question type now covers both single-select and multi-select dropdowns; set **Maximum** above 1 under **Multiple selections** in its settings to allow more than one answer. ## Multi-factor question types - Matrix (common scale) - Multi-Factor Opinion Slider - Multi-Factor Scale ## Picture Choice question types - Picture Choice — a single question type for image-based selection (configure single- or multi-select in its settings). **Picture Comments** (for open-ended comments on an image) is also in the Picture Choices category, but it does not return a value and can't be used in a calculator formula. --- # Conditional Messages in Calculator Results https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/conditional-messages-in-calculator-results/ This feature allows you to show customized messages based on a respondent's result. The message that shows is controlled by conditional parameters set by you. For example, if a sales team member submits quarterly sales in higher than the previous quarter they would receive a "Congratulations, you're a sales maestro!" messages. Whereas if they fail to meet last quarter's sales, they would receive a different message; "We've still got some work to do." Let's get into the steps of setting up conditional messages. ## How to add conditional messages To add conditional messaging, you must start by clicking one of your results to open its settings. Then click the toggle labelled "Conditional messages" above the heading. ![](/help-images/conditional-messages-in-calculator-results/file-vN3T7toMYW.png) You'll always start with a single condition by default. You can then use the Condition Parameters to set when this message triggers. In our example calculator, we're comparing sales volume from the current quarter to the same quarter of the previous year. There are three messages that we want to show based on the returned result: - Where the percentage of sales is higher - Where the percentage of sales is the same - Where the percentage of sales is lower ## Select an operator and add a value So, lets get started with that first message. We want this to show when the sales value from this quarter has grown compared to the last quarter. Click the first Operator field and select the relevant operator: ![](/help-images/conditional-messages-in-calculator-results/file-j8w6Qtg1IA.png) As we're displaying this as a percentage, we're only concerned with showing this message for any value greater than 0. So, we'll select the greater than (>) operator and enter 0 into the value field. ![](/help-images/conditional-messages-in-calculator-results/file-tCd8f4QRFQ.png) We also have the option to set another condition, but in this case we only need to show this message for any value greater than 0. So, for the second condition we can set the operator to N/A. ![](/help-images/conditional-messages-in-calculator-results/file-0yFJbXdXlQ.png) ## Add your message text Then you'll add the heading for the message (which appears above the result) and a description (which appears below the result). ![](/help-images/conditional-messages-in-calculator-results/file-DVmHV8fqUd.png) ## Adding another conditional message Now we want to add the conditions for the other two messages we want to appear. To add a new message, click the + icon next to your first conditional message: ![](/help-images/conditional-messages-in-calculator-results/file-veKyKpLTU2.png)Then choose between creating a new blank condition or duplicating an existing one. ![](/help-images/conditional-messages-in-calculator-results/file-ma04sIFOXP.png)Then simply follow the above steps to create additional messages that appear according to differing conditions. In the case of our example, we need two more conditions. One to show when the sales volume is the same as the previous quarter, in which case the conditions would be ==0: ![](/help-images/conditional-messages-in-calculator-results/file-DiwySU3OaJ.png) And then finally, a message to display when the sales volume is lower than the previous quarter, where the condition would be <0. ![](/help-images/conditional-messages-in-calculator-results/file-LPkqCbhOZm.png) --- # How to Copy a Formula https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/copy-a-formula/ It's possible to duplicate any existing formulas you've created by: 1. Click any result to open the Calculated Result popup![Calculated Results Popup](/help-images/copy-a-formula/file-gP2KbUokEI.png) 2. Open the **Select a formula** drop-down and select the formula you'd like to copy![Select a Formula To Copy](/help-images/copy-a-formula/file-Rg2eVgKcNq.png) 3. Click the **pencil icon** to edit the formula ![Select Edit Formula](/help-images/copy-a-formula/file-IIzn4W72NI.png) 4. Click the **Copy icon** ![Click The Copy Formula Icon](/help-images/copy-a-formula/file-HF17lPi8f6.png) This will take you to your duplicated formula, named after the original with a "-copy" suffix (e.g. `plan-cost` becomes `plan-cost-copy`) — rename it in the **Name your formula** field if you'd like: ![Duplicated Formula](/help-images/copy-a-formula/file-UP1xPssCwG.png) --- # How to Create a Custom Calculator https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/create-a-custom-calculator/ To start building your first interactive calculator, you'll need an active Shout account. If you haven't created one yet, now is the perfect time to do so! Signing up is quick and easy, so you can explore the full potential of our calculator builder for yourself. ## How to create a custom calculator 1. Log into your Shout account 2. From the Home dashboard, click **New form** 3. Choose **Start from scratch** (or describe the calculator in a sentence and click **Build with AI** to get a first draft, or **Upload a document** to convert an existing pricing sheet) 4. On the **Set up your form** screen, name your calculator, select **Calculator** under **Form type**, and choose **One per page** or **Many per page** under **Questions per page**, then click **Create form**: ![Set up your form screen showing Form type and Questions per page options](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-CxqcDE7ziE.png) 5. In the **Form** tab of the builder, click **+ QUESTION** ![Form builder sidebar showing Page 1 and the + Question button](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-rs8NfNo9tF.png) 6. Select a question type. Most question types can be used in calculators — turn on the **Calculator value** filter in the picker to highlight which ones return a value your formula can use (we'll devote a section listing these a bit further down): ![Question type picker with Calculator value compatibility highlighted](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-pNQV1WhXSd.png) 7. Add values to your question answers![Assign Values To Calculator Questions](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-J5KtVQdms3.png) Compliance and privacy options (pseudonymization, referral tracking, cookies) are no longer part of the creation wizard — configure them any time from the **Settings** tab of the builder, under **Privacy & Security**. ## Building a Formula Once you've added questions to your calculator, you can start building a formula. To make this as clear as possible we'll build an formula based on an example of a pricing quote calculator. To create a calculator formula, you must first navigate to your **Calculator result** exit page and click "Add new result": ![Add Formulas To Calculator Results](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-U7nZulVQYZ.png) :::tip **Pro Tip**: You don't have to wait for the exit page — click the **calculate** icon in any question's toolbar and turn on **Show result on page** to add a result panel that updates live alongside that question as respondents answer it. ::: ### 1\. Formula Setup After you've clicked "Add new result", a popup dialogue will appear where you can give name and description to your formula. ![Build a Formula For Web Calculators](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-A8DQmOytRb.png) - **Heading**: Text in this field will act as the title for the results section. For our example, this will be "Total Cost". - **Description**: A field for you to add additional information regarding the results. For our example, this will read "Totals may differ from final quote dependant on tax". - **Select Image**: Import an image to display alongside this result, e.g. a logo. - **Add CTA / Button to result**: Toggle this on to add a button below this result that sends those who click it to an external URL, e.g. your website. ### 2\. Create a new formula To find the formula builder, click the + icon at the top of the popup (or choose "Create a new formula" from the **Select a formula** dropdown): ![Create a New Calculator Formula](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-iFTEcseWPv.png) The formula builder will then appear: ![Simple Formula Builder For Web Calculators](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-0EQkF7VgB8.png) We recommend giving your formula a unique name, so you can easily identify it when choosing which results to show: ![Name Your Interactive Calculator Formula](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-jvfv4xkFIJ.png) By default, all questions that can be used in your formula will be present. To add questions into your formula, you can drag and drop them in from the Question data section on the left: **![Drag And Drop Formula Builder For Custom Calculators](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-WQcyrMQVQU.png) ** **Questions you add to your formula will be highlighted in blue in the questions sidebar.** In our example Price Quote Calculator, we have two fields: 1. Select a Plan 2. Select a Number of Seats So, for the purposes of this example we want to add the cost of the subscription and the cost of individual seats up. Our first question is a multiple-choice, where value can be assigned to individual answers: ![Assign Values To Calculator Fields](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-6ETKsudnfh.png) Our second question is a Numeric Slider, where the values are set as the numbers along that slider (e.g. 0-10). ![Define Values In Formulas](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-EQU8L4KbVg.png) So, we need to define the cost of the "seats" in our formula. Let's say we want to price it at $75 per seat, we'd build this formula: Q\_1+(Q2\*75) ![Create Formulas To Calculate Results](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-xB95uU71p9.png) Prefer working in a spreadsheet-style grid? Switch to the **Excel table** tab next to **Simple** to build the same formula in table form. Make sure to hit "Save Changes". Pro Tip: You'll also see above that if you add test values into the corresponding fields on the left, we'll calculate a test results for you at the bottom of the formula builder. ## Displaying Results Now that you've set up your formula, respondents will see it on the **Calculator result** exit page once they finish the questions. You can also preview it yourself from the **Send** tab, or check aggregated response data from the **Results** tab. ![Show Calculator Results](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-icJY93QbN0.png) You can also show a result in real time, next to a question, instead of (or as well as) on the exit page. Click the **calculate** icon in that question's toolbar and turn on **Show result on page**: ![Show Calculator Results Next To Calculators](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-sdE6B7d3yU.png) This splits the page and adds an **Add new result** button on the right — set it up the same way as an exit-page result, and it will update live in a panel next to the question as respondents answer it: ![Results Displayed Next To Quesitons](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-KnfJ2evi1d.png) We can also add more formulas to provide a break down of the costs involved: ![Add Multiple Formulas To A Results Section](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-HuOj6FEI3Y.png) ### Calculation Ranges Incorporate ranges into your outcomes whenever they prove essential. In the formula builder's **Formatting** panel, expand **Display range** and set upper and lower limits as percentages. For instance, if your formula yields a result of $350 and the upper and lower bounds are defined at 10% each, the display will read as '$315 to $385'. ![Add Ranges To Custom Calculator Results](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-XQnXClHemv.png) ### Adding Variables It's also possible to add a Prefix or Suffix to your final results, under the **Unit** panel in Formatting. Common prefixes for online calculators are $, £, and €, whilst common suffixes are lb, kg, and %. ![Add Prefix And Suffix To Calculator Results](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-y4L869hObI.png) ### Decimal Places You also have the ability to customize the number of decimal places that display with your results, under **Number Format** in Formatting. ![Add Decimal Places To Calculator Results](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-MMvN4PR3AL.png) ### Testing Values You can use the Test Value fields below questions in the formula builder to test if your formula is working as intended. The calculation will appear at the bottom of the formula builder. ![Test Values In The Formula Builder](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-UnCRUhyXJj.png) ### Changing Question IDs By default, each calculator question is assigned an auto-generated ID number (shown with a `Q_` prefix) that displays in the formula builder. This ID can be customized in the **Name/Id** field beneath a question. ![Change Quesiton IDs For Formulas](/help-images/create-a-custom-calculator/file-FDZDnyPlVF.png) This can help you easily identify questions in your formula. ## Calculator Question Types Any question type that can have a value applied can be used to build formulas. In the question type picker, turn on the **Calculator value** filter under **Highlight compatible** to see exactly which types qualify. Here's a list of the available question types below — see [Calculator Question Types](/build/calculators/calculator-question-types/) for more detail: Standard question types - Multi-Choice (Single Select) - Multi-Choice (Multi Select) - Opinion Scale - Opinion Slider - Binary Yes/No - Net Promoter Score® - Star Rating - Drop Down List (single- or multi-select, configurable in its settings) Multi-factor question types - Matrix (common scale) - Multi-Factor Opinion Slider - Multi-Factor Scale Numeric question type Decimal, Integer, and Currency are no longer separate cards — they're all **Number types** of a single **Number / Money** question (add the question, then set **Number type** under **Show more settings**). There is no dedicated **Age** number type any more. A standalone **Numeric Slider** question type is also available. You can also add any other survey question types or form fields to calculators to collect research data or personal information. ## Calculator Operators When building your formulas, you can input the following basic operators using your keyboard: - \+ (Addition) - \- (Subtraction) - \* (Multiplication) - / (Division) The formula builder toolbar also has quick-insert buttons for **If statement** and **round**, and you can employ other functions available in Excel formulas. --- # Decimal Question https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/decimal/ Decimal is a **Number type** on the unified **Number / Money** question — it lets you collect numeric values with decimal places, e.g. 2.55. When you add a question and choose **Number / Money** from the question type picker, open **Show more settings** and set **Number type** to **Decimal** to enable decimal input. ![Decimal Question Type](/help-images/decimal/file-GUX31r9VdG.png) ## Decimal Question Settings ![Decimal Question Settings](/help-images/decimal/file-8g9m4GsIbt.png) - **Required**: Require respondents to answer this question before submitting a response. - **Number Type**: Switch the accepted input values between Integer (whole number), Decimal and Currency. - **Decimal Places**: Customize the number of decimal places a respondent can input (0-4). - **Min Value**: Set a minimum value that can be entered. - **Max Value**: Set a maximum value that can be entered. - **Prefix**: Add a word, letter, number or symbol to appear before the input value. - **Postfix**: Add a word, letter, number or symbol to appear after the input value. - **Link to Contact detail**: Map this question to a Contact field so answers are saved back to the respondent's Contact record instead of just the response data (the current equivalent of the old "Personal Info" toggle; see [Pseudonymization](/build/surveys/pseudonymization/) for handling sensitive answers). - **Numbered**: Enable/disable the question numbering. ## Decimal Results ![Decimal Question Results](/help-images/decimal/file-iPlGLemrcE.png)The below data will be available for Decimal question types: - **Average**: The average value of all respondent inputs. - **Min**: The smallest value input. - **Max**: The largest value input. - **Response count**: The total number of responses for this question. - **Numeric responses**: A list of all individual answers (displayed below aggregated data). --- # How to Delete a Formula https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/delete-a-formula/ If you no longer need a formula in your calculator, you can delete it by: 1. Click any result to open the Calculated Result popup![Calculated Results Popup](/help-images/delete-a-formula/file-gP2KbUokEI.png) 2. Open the **Select a formula** drop-down and select the formula you'd like to delete![Select a Formula To Delete](/help-images/delete-a-formula/file-Rg2eVgKcNq.png) 3. Click the **pencil icon** to edit the formula ![Select Edit Formula](/help-images/delete-a-formula/file-IIzn4W72NI.png) 4. Click the **trash can icon** to delete the formula![Click The Delete Icon](/help-images/delete-a-formula/file-9pVyW4dqTV.png) 5. Click **Delete Formula**![Delete Your Formula](/help-images/delete-a-formula/file-5iU4AZyksM.png) :::caution **Warning**: Once a formula is deleted, it's impossible to recover. So, you would need to create the formula again from scratch. ::: --- # Embed Calculators On Your Website https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/embed-calculators/ Just like with surveys, quizzes, and forms, you're able to embed calculators on your website. Embedded calculators will appear along side all other content on your page. You can customise the colours of your theme to match your website, so the calculator doesn't stick out. ## How to embed calculators on your website Once you've created a calculator, you'll have a range of options for sharing your calculator. ### 1\. Go to the Send section of your calculator Here you'll find all the ways you can distribute your calculator. ![Send Section Of Online Calcualtors](/help-images/embed-calculators/file-NnL7NTir7Q.png) ### 2\. Navigate to the embed option Click Embed in the left sidebar or scroll down to the Inline Embed section. ![Embed Option For Custom Calculators](/help-images/embed-calculators/file-7SGAfEh34U.png) ### 3\. Click Get the Code ![Get The Code Button For Interactive Calculators](/help-images/embed-calculators/file-VVjMv5AH61.png) This will display the code you need to copy for your website (the button becomes "Hide the code" once expanded). ![Embed Code For Web Calculators](/help-images/embed-calculators/file-nHmIupXsld.png) From this section you'll be able to view a preview of your embed. To do so, just tick the "Show a preview" box. Note that a live preview will only load correctly once the calculator has been published. You can also customise the height of your embeddable calculator. The Height dropdown defaults to "Auto" — switch it to "Fixed" to customise the height. Once set to Fixed, a "Set fixed height" number field appears along with a Unit dropdown so you can switch the unit of measurement between pixel (px), percentages (%), and viewport's height (vh). ### 4\. Copy the Code Simply click anywhere in the code to highlight it, then copy it to your clipboard. --- # Excel Table Formula Builder https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/excel-table-formula-builder/ If you want to build a calculator but have already set up the formulas in Excel, you can upload your spreadsheet and select a cell to display results from. Alternatively, you may have a dataset that you'd like your calculator to reference when returning a result. In this article we'll cover everything you need to know when using an Excel spreadsheet as part of your calculator formula. ## 1\. Switch to the Excel style table Once you've created a new formula, you can click Excel table to navigate to the excel style formula builder. ![Excel Style Formula Builder](/help-images/excel-table-formula-builder/file-Q6BeZQdRfZ.png) ## 2\. Upload your Excel spreadsheet Click Upload Excel below the table and select a spreadsheet to import. After importing your spreadsheet, you'll see your data populating the Excel style table. ![Import Excel Spreadsheets For Formulas](/help-images/excel-table-formula-builder/file-zZce8XGHgA.png)Our above example is the total sales volumes for Q1 to Q4 from 2020 to 2023. You'll see a blank row for 2024, which is where we'll map our question cells. But before we do that, let's go over what formulas are already in place so you can see what's happening behind the scenes. Along row 7, we've got a basic SUM formula in place. ![Use Excel Formulas In Calculators](/help-images/excel-table-formula-builder/file-zKm1PLkJa0.png) We may not use this for this calculation, but it's a nice to have. Along Row 8, we're calculating the percentage change between sales in Q1 to Q4 in 2023 and 2024. ![Calculate Results With Excel Formulas](/help-images/excel-table-formula-builder/file-zI27IaOu0l.png)This is the value we'll be returning in our calculator. Essentially, we want to display what the percentage increase or decrease was between 2023 Q1 and 2024 Q1. To do this, we need top map the first question in our calculator into B6, so the value given can be used in our formula. ## 3\. Map your questions into cells To map your questions into cells, all you need to do is drag your question from the left into the desired cell. ![Test Values In Excel Calculators](/help-images/excel-table-formula-builder/file-b7mdDa4eQZ.png)After you've dropped the question, a unique question number will be displayed in the cell. This is the formula that dictates the value entered into the cell. ![Map Calculator Questions To Excel Spreadsheets](/help-images/excel-table-formula-builder/file-6E8pP15BOv.png)Once you click away from the cell, the test value present beneath the question on the left will instead be displayed. ![Test Values In Spreadsheet Calculators](/help-images/excel-table-formula-builder/file-i5omK4FHYK.png) ## 4\. Designate a results cell Once you've mapped all your question cells, you need to designate a cell that returns a result. In our case, this would be B8, as we want to show the percentage change between B6 and B5. To choose a results cell, click RESULT CELL beneath the table and enter a cell: ![Map Result Cells For Excel Calculators](/help-images/excel-table-formula-builder/file-aq0KV20LH3.png)Because of the nature of our example, we also want to add a suffix to our respondents know this value is a percentage: ![Add Suffix Prefix To Excel Table Formulas](/help-images/excel-table-formula-builder/file-77XZEETR4o.png)Make sure you hit Save Changes to ensure your formula and data is saved. If you want to show multiple results, you'll need to follow this process for each of the results you want to display. However, if you're using the same dataset and formulas for each results, we recommend that you duplicate your formula. Then, all you need to do is access your copied formula and select a different results cell. In the case of the example we've been following, I'd duplicate this and then select C8 to show the results for Q2. --- # Formula Operators in Calculators https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/formula-operators/ When creating a calculator, you have two options for building out a formula: - Simple formula builder - Excel style table The simple formula builder essentially operates as a single Excel cell, so anything you can achieve with a single cell you can achieve with that. The Excel style builder givers you access to an entire table, where you can import reference data and select a desired results cell. ## Basic Operators Here's a list of these basic operators: | Condition | Operator | Formula example | Value example | Result | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Add**
Find the sum of two or more values. | + | Q\_1300 + Q\_1301 | 100+45 | 145 | | **Minus
**Subtract a value from another. | \- | Q\_1300 - Q\_1301 | 200-80 | 120 | | **Divide
**Divide a value by another value. | / | Q\_1300 / Q\_1301 | 100/20 | 5 | | **Multiply
**Multiply a value by another value. | \* | Q\_1300 \* Q\_1301 | 5\*30 | 150 | | **Percent
**Express a value as a percentage. | % | Q\_1300% | 30% | 0.3 | | **Power
**Multiply a value by itself a specified number of times. | ^ | Q\_1300 ^ 1301 | 3^2 | 9 | | **Grouping**
Define operations that should be performed first. | ( ) | Q\_1300 \* (Q\_1301 + Q\_1302) | 2\*(3+5) | 16
| | **Max Function
**Return the maximum value from all given values. | Max | Max (Q\_1300, Q\_1301, Q\_1302) | Max(300,75,400) | 400 | | **Min Function
**Return the minimum value from all given values. | Min | Min (Q\_1300, Q\_1301, Q\_1302) | Min(30,120,50) | 30 | :::tip **Tip**: When using multiple operators in a formula, these will be executed according to the BODMAS order of operations. ::: ## Comparison and Reference Operators You also have access to a wider range of operators. Most of these can still be used in the Simple formula builder, but if you need to reference a dataset we'd recommend using the Excel-style formula builder. | Condition | Operator | Examples | | --- | --- | --- | | **Range (Excel table only)**
Defines a range to be used as part of a formula. | : | A1 **:** A4 | | **Union (Excel table only)**
Allows you to define multiple ranges to be used in formulae. | , | SUM (A1:A4 **,**B1:B4) | | **Equals**
Test if one value is equal to another. Returns TRUE or FALSE. | \= | Q\_1300 **\=** 100
| | **Greater Than**
Test whether one value is greater than another value. Returns TRUE or FALSE. | \> | Q\_1300 **\>** 200
| | **Less Than**
Test if one value is less than another. Returns TRUE or FALSE. | < | Q\_1300 **<** 150
| | **Greater Than or Equal To**
Test if one value is greater than or equal to another. Returns TRUE or FALSE. | \>= | Q\_1300 **\>=** 10
| | **Less Than or Equal To**
Test if one value is less than or equal to another. Returns TRUE or FALSE. | <= | Q\_1300 **<=** Q\_1301
| | **Not Equal To**
Test if one value is not equal to another. Returns TRUE or FALSE. | <> | Q\_1300 **<>** Q\_1301
| | | | | Note: Any formula that returns a text answer (e.g. TRUE, FALSE) cannot be shown as a total. ## Using IF Statements IF statements allow to to show one of two results depending on whether a logical condition you set has been met. There are four variants of the IF function: IF, IF with AND, IF OR, and IF NOT. Let's get into those below: | Function | Description | Formula Example | Explanation | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | IF | IF a statement is true, THEN return value 1, ELSE return value 2. | IF(Q\_3180>=1000,Q\_3180-(Q\_3180\*0.1),Q\_3180) | IF question 1 returns a value of greater than or equal to 1000, THEN apply a 10% discount, ELSE the initial value is given as the result. | | IF with AND | IF statement 1 is true AND statement 2 is true, THEN return value 1, ELSE return value 2. | IF(AND(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) | IF question 1 returns a value higher than 500 AND question 2 returns a value greater than 100, THEN return the sum of both values minus 10%, ELSE return the sum of questions 1 and 2. | | IF OR | IF statement 1 is true OR statement 2 is true, THEN return value 1, ELSE return value 2.
| IF(OR(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) | IF question 1 returns a value higher than 500 OR question 2 returns a value higher than 100, THEN return the sum of both values minus 10%, ELSE return the sum of questions 1 and 2. | | IF NOT | IF statement 1 is NOT true, THEN return value 1, ELSE return value 2. | IF(NOT(Q\_3180+Q\_3187>=1000), Q\_3180+Q\_3187,Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1) | IF the sum of question 1 and question 2 is NOT greater than or equal to 1000, THEN return the sum of question 1 and question 2, ELSE return the sum of question 1 and question 2 minus 10%. | You can head over to our help doc all about creating IF statements for a walk-through on each of the above. --- # Integer/ Whole Number Question https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/integer-whole-number/ The Integer/ Whole Number question type allows you to collect whole numbers as values. In the question type picker it's listed under the combined **Number / Money** question — add a Number / Money question, then leave (or set) its **Number type** setting to "Integer". ![Integer/ Whole Number Question Type](/help-images/integer-whole-number/file-AqhwLbWWRu.png) ## Integer/ Whole Number Question Settings Click "Show more settings" beneath the question to reveal the full settings panel: ![Integer/ Whole Number Question Settings](/help-images/integer-whole-number/file-19UKKoXEpN.png) - **Required**: Require respondents to answer this question before submitting a response. - **Number Type**: Switch the accepted input values between Integer (whole number), Decimal and Currency. - **Min Value**: Set a minimum value that can be entered. - **Max Value**: Set a maximum value that can be entered. - **Prefix**: Add a word, letter, number or symbol to appear before the input value. - **Postfix**: Add a word, letter, number or symbol to appear after the input value. - **Numbered**: Enable/disable the question numbering. The **Personal Info** toggle (for [Pseudonymization](/build/surveys/pseudonymization/)) only appears in this panel once Pseudonymization has been enabled for the survey under Settings > Privacy & Security. ## Integer/ Whole Number Results ![Integer/ Whole Number Results](/help-images/integer-whole-number/file-mYr0sN5L1L.png)The below data will be available for Integer/ Whole Number question types: - **Average**: The average value of all respondent inputs. - **Min**: The smallest value input. - **Max**: The largest value input. - **Response count**: The total number of responses for this question. - **Numeric responses**: A list of all individual answers (displayed below aggregated data). --- # Money/ Currency Question https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/money-currency/ The money/ Currency question type allows you to collect a respondents a monetary value. In the question type picker it's listed under the combined **Number / Money** question — add a Number / Money question, then set its **Number type** setting to "Currency". ![Money/ Currency Question Type](/help-images/money-currency/file-FsaUqNhlB3.png) ## Money/ Currency Question Settings Click "Show more settings" beneath the question, then set Number type to Currency to reveal the full settings panel: ![Money/ Currency Question Settings](/help-images/money-currency/file-YuGNuBG7zJ.png) - **Required**: Require respondents to answer this question before submitting a response. - **Number Type**: Switch the accepted input values between Integer (whole number), Decimal and Currency. - **Currency**: Select a currency symbol to display as a prefix (manually select a symbol or set to "Auto detect"). - **Min Value**: Set a minimum value that can be entered. - **Max Value**: Set a maximum value that can be entered. - **Decimal Places**: Customize the number of decimal places a respondent can input (0-4). - **Prefix**: Add a word, letter, number or symbol to appear before the input value (this will replace the currency symbol). - **Postfix**: Add a word, letter, number or symbol to appear after the input value. - **Numbered**: Enable/disable the question numbering. The **Personal Info** toggle (for [Pseudonymization](/build/surveys/pseudonymization/)) only appears in this panel once Pseudonymization has been enabled for the survey under Settings > Privacy & Security. ## Money/ Currency Results ![Money/ Currency Question Results](/help-images/money-currency/file-5EQmMmRlUb.png)The below data will be available for Money/ Currency question types: - **Average**: The average value of all respondent inputs. - **Min**: The smallest value input. - **Max**: The largest value input. - **Response count**: The total number of responses for this question. - **Numeric responses**: A list of all individual answers (displayed below aggregated data). --- # Numeric Slider https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/numeric-slider/ The Numeric Slider question type allows you to respondents to select a value using a slider. ![Numeric Slider Question Type](/help-images/numeric-slider/file-CvXbFDvXxv.png) ## Numeric Slider Question Settings Click "Show more settings" beneath the question to reveal the full settings panel: ![Numeric Slider Question Settings](/help-images/numeric-slider/file-dTJoZUcbMz.png) - **Required**: Require respondents to answer this question before submitting a response. - **Number Type**: Switch the accepted input values between Integer, Decimal (the default) and Currency. - **Min Value**: Set a minimum value for the slider. Required — defaults to 0. - **Max Value**: Set a maximum value for the slider. Required — defaults to 100. - **Step**: Define a value that controls the interval the slider moves by. Required — defaults to 1. - **Decimal Places**: Customize the number of decimal places a respondent can input (defaults to 2). - **Prefix**: Add a word, letter, number or symbol to appear before the input value. - **Postfix**: Add a word, letter, number or symbol to appear after the input value. - **Numbered**: Enable/disable the question numbering. The **Personal Info** toggle (for [Pseudonymization](/build/surveys/pseudonymization/)) only appears in this panel once Pseudonymization has been enabled for the survey under Settings > Privacy & Security. ## Numeric Slider Results ![Numeric Slider Question Results](/help-images/numeric-slider/file-iihw22ul98.png)The below data will be available for the Numeric Slider question type: - **Average**: The average value of all respondent inputs. - **Min**: The smallest value input. - **Max**: The largest value input. - **Response count**: The total number of responses for this question. - **Numeric responses**: A list of all individual answers (displayed below aggregated data). --- # Results in Calculators https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/results-in-calculators/ There are two ways you can display results when creating a calculator: - Show results after submission - Show results side-by-side with the calculator ## Show Results After Submission By default, the exit page of your calculator (labelled "Calculator result" in the page list) has its **Exit page type** set to "Calculator results", so respondents land on a results page once they finish. ![Show Calculator Results After Submission](/help-images/results-in-calculators/file-C0OzHfnuLu.png)However, if you choose to show results side-by-side with the calculator instead, you can switch the exit page to a custom message ("Design custom page") or redirect people to an external URL ("Redirect to web address"). To do this, select the exit page in the Build view, then use the **Exit page type** dropdown to switch it. Use the "Add new result" button on the exit page to attach a formula and give it a heading (e.g. "Total Cost") — this heading is what displays on the results page. ## Show Results Side-By-Side with the Calculator To display a result right next to your questions instead of on a separate exit page, select the question you want the result to sit alongside. A small toolbar appears above it — click the calculator icon in that toolbar: ![Display Calculator Results Button](/help-images/results-in-calculators/file-pDzLaSl0gw.png) This reveals a "Show result on page" toggle. Switch it on. ![Show Results Side-By-Side With Your Calculator](/help-images/results-in-calculators/file-MCZUb93ujf.png)The page splits into two panes — your questions on the left, and a results panel on the right with an "Add new result" button. Click it and select a formula to display (or create a new one if you haven't built one yet). :::tip **Help**: Learn how to build a formula for your own calculator. ::: Once you've selected a formula, its heading will display in the results panel alongside your calculator, with the computed value updating live as respondents answer. --- # Using IF Statements in Calculators https://docs.shout.com/build/calculators/using-if-statements/ You're able to add IF statements in your formulas, these are logical comparisons that allow you to show one of two results based on whether the results is TRUE or FALSE. For example, if you've created a pricing calculator you may want to apply a discount for those willing to spend more, you can create an IF statement to apply a percentage discount: IF(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3180-(Q\_3180\*0.1),Q\_3180) ![Create IF Statements In Web Calculators](/help-images/using-if-statements/file-b2sW7PihZF.png) The formula translates as this: IF this question returns a value greater than 500, then the result is question value -10%, IF ELSE return the question value. So, if the question returned a value of $708 then the result would be $637 (due to the 10% discount, before applying any decimal places), where as if the question returned $300 the result would be less than 500 and so no discount would be applied. ![Create IF Statements In The Simple Formula Builder](/help-images/using-if-statements/file-5Wm3UYU5Ic.png) ### How to create an IF statement Let's break down creating an IF statement into the basic steps. **1\. Start your formula with IF.** IF(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3180-(Q\_3180\*0.1),Q\_3180) **2\. Define the first part of the IF statement** IF( Q\_3180>500,Q\_3180-(Q\_3180\*0.1),Q\_3180) The above example defines this as IF the value given by the first question is greater than 500. **3\. Add a comma, then define the THEN result** IF(Q\_3180>500 ,Q\_3180-(Q\_3180\*0.1),Q\_3180) Now you need to define what happens if the result is TRUE, i.e. IF the value is greater than 500, what happens? The first comma and following equitation define the result that will be shown in the above case. **4\. Add a comma, then define the ELSE result** IF(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3180-(Q\_3180\*0.1) ,Q\_3180) Finally, you need to define what happens if the result is FALSE, i.e. IF the value is not greater than 500. The second comma and following equitation define the ELSE result. ## IF Statements with AND IF statements with AND allow you to show one of two results depending on two or more values. For example, if we keep the example of a pricing calculator from the last section, we can easily add the AND statement. Previously our pricing was only dependent on a single question, now we've added a second question to the scenario. IF(AND(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) ![Use IF AND Statements In Calculators](/help-images/using-if-statements/file-GtDcbJGSix.png) We understand this looks a little complicated, but we can easily break it down below. ### How to create an IF statement with AND Let's break down creating an IF statement with AND into basic steps. As an example ,our formula is that of a pricing calculator where there are two factors: the cost of the plan and the cost of additional seats a person may want to add to that plan. We want to build a formula where IF the cost of the plan is above $500 and the total cost of additional seats is above $100, then we want to apply a 10% discount on the total cost. **1\. Start your formula with IF(AND** IF(AND(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) **2\. Define the first part of your IF statement** IF(AND(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) The above defines this as IF the value given by the first question is greater than 500. So, in our example; IF the cost of the plan is above $500. **3\. Add a comma, then define the AND statement** IF(AND(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) This second part of the equation defines what other variable needs to be met for our discount to be applied. In our case, the total cost of the additional seats needs to be above $100. **4\. Add a comma, then define what result to show if both the IF & AND are true** IF(AND(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) This part of the equation defines what result will show if both results are true, i.e. question 1 returns a value higher than 500 and question 2 returns a value higher than 100. In our case this is a simple percentage calculation, which is essentially: Plan Cost + Seat Cost - (10%). **5\. Add a comma, then define what happens if either the IF or AND are false** IF(AND(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1,Q\_3180+Q\_3187) Finally, you need to define what happens if the result is FALSE, i.e. IF the value of question 1 is not greater than 500 or the value of question 2 if lower than 100. Tip: Don't forget to add the final closed bracket ) to the formula or it will generate an error. ## IF Statements with OR IF statements with OR allow you to show one of two results where only one variable needs to be met. Again, if we keep the example of a pricing calculator from the previous sections, we can apply our discount based on whether they want to spend over $500 on the plan OR over $100 on the additional seats. The formula for this would be: IF(OR(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) ### How to create an IF statement with OR Let's break down creating an IF statement with OR into basic steps. Continuing the previous example ,our formula is that of a pricing calculator where there are two factors: the cost of the plan and the cost of additional seats a person may want to add to that plan. We want to build a formula where IF the cost of the plan is above $500 OR the total cost of additional seats is above $100, then we want to apply a 10% discount to the total cost. **1\. Start your formula with IF(OR** IF(OR(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) **2\. Define the first part of your IF statement** IF(OR(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) The above defines this as IF the value given by the first question is greater than 500. So, in our example; IF the cost of the plan is above $500. **3\. Add a comma, then define the OR statement** IF(OR(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) This second part of the equation defines what alternative variable can be met for our discount to be applied. In our case, the total cost of the additional seats needs to be above $100. **4\. Add a comma, then define what result to show if either results are true** IF(OR(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1, Q\_3180+Q\_3187) This part of the equation defines what result will show if either of results are true, i.e. question 1 returns a value higher than 500 OR question 2 returns a value higher than 100. **5\. Add a comma, then define what happens if both variables are false** IF(OR(Q\_3180>500,Q\_3187>100),Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1,Q\_3180+Q\_3187) Finally, you need to define what happens if the result is FALSE, i.e. IF the value of question 1 is not greater than 500 AND the value of question 2 if lower than 100. In the case of our example, the cost would remain the same (no discount is applied). Tip: Don't forget to add the final closed bracket ) to the formula or it will generate an error. ## IF NOT Statements IF NOT statements allow you to show one of two results depending on whether the value returned is TRUE or FALSE. Following on with our pricing calculator example, we want to only give a discount if someone spends more than $1000. So, if the values returned for both questions in our calculator do not return a value of 1000 or more, then no discount is applied. For this the formula for this would be: IF(NOT(Q\_3180+Q\_3187>=1000), Q\_3180+Q\_3187,Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1) ### How to create an IF statement with OR Let's break down creating an IF statement with OR into basic steps. Continuing the previous example ,our formula is that of a pricing calculator where there are two factors: the cost of the plan and the cost of additional seats a person may want to add to that plan. We want to build a formula where IF the cost of the plan is above $500 OR the total cost of additional seats is above $100, then we want to apply a 10% discount to the total cost. **1\. Start your formula with IF(NOT** IF(NOT(Q\_3180+Q\_3187>=1000), Q\_3180+Q\_3187,Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1) **2\. Define the first part of your IF statement** IF(NOT(Q\_3180+Q\_3187>=1000), Q\_3180+Q\_3187,Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1) This is the part of the formula that states that the combined value of questions 1 and 2 need to be greater than or equal to 1000. **3\. Add a comma, then define the THEN statement** IF(NOT(Q\_3180+Q\_3187>=1000), Q\_3180+Q\_3187,Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1) This second part of the equation defines that the full cost should be shown if the result is NOT greater than or equal to 1000. **4\. Add a comma, then define what happens if both variables are false** IF(NOT(Q\_3180+Q\_3187>=1000), Q\_3180+Q\_3187,Q\_3180+Q\_3187-(Q\_3180+Q\_3187)\*0.1) The final part of the equation defines what formula should be applied if the value returned IS greater than or equal to 1000. In the case of our example, a 10% discount would be applied to the price. Tip: Don't forget to add the final closed bracket ) to the formula or it will generate an error. --- # How to Create a Consent Form https://docs.shout.com/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/ ## What is a Consent Form? The purpose of a consent form is to gain the permission of, or make an agreement with, a respondent. They will also serve as evidence of this permission or agreement. They will often include the below points: - Project aims and goals - Purpose of the project - Outline of questions - If/ how confidentiality will be protected - How respondents withdraw from the project - How data will be used - If data will be published - Signatures and dates of signing - Any other details relevant to gaining informed consent ## Why use a Consent Form? You can use a consent form to inform respondents as to how you’ll store or use their data once it’s collected, and require them to agree or disagree to your terms. They are commonly used where sensitive or private information is being communicated and exist to protect the rights of all concerned parties. ## How to Create a Consent Form **Tip**: The consent form should be free from technical language, and completely understandable by the respondent. You'll build a Consent Form using the same page and Logic tools as [qualification questions](/build/forms/how-to-create-qualification-questions/) — see [About Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/about-logic/), [Default Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/) and [Page Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/) for background. After presenting all relevant information to the respondent, you will ask them to accept or decline the terms you've outlined. They will be granted access to the rest of your form if they give consent, or will be sent to a [Thank You page](/build/pages/exit-and-thank-you-pages/) or disqualification page if not. 1. Create a form 2. Add a page at the start of your form to be the consent page. A new form starts with a single "Page 1" — either build your consent content there, or click the **⋮** icon next to a page title, choose **Add page → Question Page**, then use **⋮ → Reorder pages** to drag it to the front **Note**: Ensure this page is placed before any questions 3. Add a second exit page (Thank You page) for those who do not give consent: click the **⋮** icon next to any page title (or the **+ Page** shortcut under "Exit pages" in the Form tab), choose **Add page → Exit Page** **Note**: New exit pages are added after your existing ones, so respondents who give consent won't see this second page unless Logic sends them to it (if you don't intend on customizing either Exit page, you'll only need one) 4. Click **+ Question** on the consent page and add a **Paragraph** (listed under "Content Items") to [present your project information](/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-text/) to respondents — a **Heading / Greeting** works too if you just need a title 5. Click **+ Question** again and choose **Multi-Choice (Single Select)** (under "Standard Questions"), and make this your consent request, e.g. "I Agree" / "I Do Not Agree" 6. Expand the question (**Show more settings → Logic**) and, next to your negative/disqualifying answer, choose the second exit page from the drop-down (it defaults to "Next Page (Default)") 7. You can also set the "I Agree" answer's Logic to send respondents straight to your questions, but it's not essential — by default, respondents who don't pick a disqualifying answer are simply carried forward when they click **Next Page** :::note Logic set on a page ("Default end of page skip to") or on an individual answer (via a question's **Logic** panel) only takes effect once a respondent clicks **Next Page** (or **Finish**) — nothing happens the instant they select an answer. ::: :::tip Shout also has a purpose-built **Consent** question type (**+ Question → Special → Consent**) for recording GDPR-style consent — e.g. a marketing opt-in — directly against a contact's record, rather than gating the rest of the form. See [How to Use the Consent Question Type](/build/forms/how-to-use-the-consent-question-type/). Use the Multi-Choice approach above when you need to disqualify respondents or redirect them based on their answer. ::: ## Removing Disqualified Respondents from your Results You can customize your report to only include qualified respondents, by using the **Filter & Compare** feature in Results. **To do this:** 1. Go to **Results** 2. Open **Filter & Compare** in the sidebar, then click **Add Filter** 3. Set "Filter by" to **Form Question Answers** 4. Choose your qualifying question from the **Question** drop-down 5. Choose the qualifying answer for results concerning the qualified respondents OR choose the disqualifying answer for results concerning the disqualified respondents, then click **Save** **Note**: This Report feature will require you to have a paid account. --- # How to Create Qualification Questions https://docs.shout.com/build/forms/how-to-create-qualification-questions/ ## What are Qualification Questions? These questions use [Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/about-logic/) to disqualify respondents from completing your form. For more information on Logic, you can read these articles concerning [Default Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/) and [Page Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/). ### Why use Qualification Questions? The purpose of these questions is to remove unwanted or unnecessary respondents from your survey and give you more control over what your results will look like. I.e. You may only want a specific demographic or group to answer every question in your survey, so removing respondents that do not fit into these groups will keep your results from becoming tainted. **Note**: It’s fine to include other more general question on the disqualification page, or on prior pages if you want all participants to answer them. E.g. Contact Details. ## How to Create Qualification Questions 1. Create a form 2. Add a new page near the start of your form, to be the Qualification Question host page: click the **⋮** icon next to any page title, choose **Add page → Question Page** **Note**: Ensure this page is placed before any pages containing questions that disqualified respondents need to skip 3. Add a second [Exit/ Thank You page](/build/pages/exit-and-thank-you-pages/) for disqualified respondents: click the **⋮** icon next to a page title (or the **+ Page** shortcut under "Exit pages" in the Form tab), choose **Add page → Exit Page** **Note**: The disqualification exit page is added after the standard exit page so that successful respondents don’t see it. If you need to change the order of any pages, use **⋮ → Reorder pages** and drag them into place 4. Add your disqualification questions to the chosen host page: click **+ Question**, then choose a question type such as **Multi-Choice (Single Select)** under "Standard Questions" 5. Insert your disqualifying answer choices 6. Expand the question (**Show more settings → Logic**) and, next to your disqualifying answer(s), choose the disqualification exit page you created above from the drop-down ## Removing Disqualified Respondents from your Results You can customize your report to only include qualified respondents, by using our [filtering feature](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/how-to-filter-and-compare-results/). **To do this:** 1. Go to **Results** 2. Open **Filter & Compare** in the sidebar, then click **Add Filter** 3. Set "Filter by" to **Form Question Answers** 4. Choose your qualifying question from the **Question** drop-down 5. Choose the qualifying answer for results concerning the qualified respondents OR choose the disqualifying answer for results concerning the disqualified respondents, then click **Save** Alternatively, you could keep disqualified respondents in your report and use **Filter & Compare** to analyze correlations between demographic answers and disqualification. You can also describe a complex filter in the AI bar. _E.g._ 1. Require all respondents to answer personal information questions 2. Disqualify respondents that don’t fit into your target population 3. Examine the relationship between personal background and whether a respondent was disqualified 4. Use this information to narrow the scope of your target population in your next form **Note**: Both Report features will require you to have a paid account. --- # How to Use the Consent Question Type https://docs.shout.com/build/forms/how-to-use-the-consent-question-type/ ## What Is the Consent Question Type? Alongside the standard question types, Shout has a purpose-built **Consent** question for capturing GDPR-style consent — such as a marketing opt-in — and recording it directly against the respondent's contact record. It's a different tool from the Multi-Choice "Agree / Do Not Agree" approach described in [How to Create a Consent Form](/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/): - Use the **Consent** question type when you want a respondent's answer to update their contact record's consent status (e.g. for marketing or data-processing consent). - Use a **Multi-Choice (Single Select)** question with Logic when you need to disqualify respondents or branch them to different pages based on whether they consent — closer to a traditional informed-consent gate for a research survey. ## How to Add a Consent Question 1. Open your form's **Build** tab 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Under the **Special** category, choose **Consent** The question is added with default text of "Your consent to data processing." — edit this like any other question. ## Linking Consent Groups A new Consent question won't display anything to respondents until it's linked to at least one **consent group** — the same groups your account uses to record GDPR/marketing consent on contacts. 1. On the Consent question, click **Manage consent groups** (under "Linked consent groups") 2. This opens **Settings → Contact Saving**, where a **Groups** drop-down lists your account's consent groups — for example "Form Sign-Ups (Legitimate interests)" or "Marketing (Explicit consent)" 3. Select the group(s) you want this question to cover Each linked group renders as its own checkbox on the form, labelled with the group's name and its pre-configured opt-in text (for example, the "Marketing" group shows "I agree to receive marketing communications, including updates, promotions, and newsletters."). :::note The same **Groups** selector in **Settings → Contact Saving** also controls which consent groups any contact saved from this form is enrolled into — linking a group to a Consent question and enabling contact saving for that group are the same setting. ::: :::tip At the time of writing, expanding a Consent question's own **Logic** panel did not reliably display configurable rules. If you need to route or disqualify respondents based on their answer, use a Multi-Choice (Single Select) question instead — see [How to Create a Consent Form](/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/). ::: --- # About Logic https://docs.shout.com/build/logic-and-answer-piping/about-logic/ If your form includes multiple [pages](/build/pages/pages/), it's possible that not all of them apply to every respondent. Logic allows you to create customised paths for your respondents, based on the answer selections they make. It can also be used to disqualify people who do not fit the criteria for your research, or those who do not give consent for their data to be processed. Logic works the same way whether your form is a Survey or a Quiz. **Note**: Page Logic and Question Logic determine which page a respondent goes to next; they do not hide questions on the current page. To show or hide a question or page based on an earlier answer, use [Conditional Display](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/conditional-display/). Page Logic and Question Logic are set up in the same place: open the **Form** tab in the builder and click the **Question logic** tab in the sidebar to see everything at a glance, or expand any question's **⋮** menu and choose **Logic** to edit it directly. Conditional Display rules are also managed from the **Logic** tab, or from a question/page's **⋮** menu. ## Page Logic Page Logic concerns where a respondent is sent once they click 'Next Page' (or move on to the next question, on a single-question-per-page form) — shown in the sidebar as **Default end of page skip to:** for each page. It's the destination used for anyone who doesn't trigger a more specific Question Logic rule on that page. By default, it sends respondents to the next chronological page (the one placed directly after it in the [page list](/build/pages/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/)), but can be set to send respondents to any page that exists AFTER the page they're currently on, or to an Exit page. - [Find out more about Page Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/) ## Question Logic Question Logic works by filtering respondents to separate pages based on the answer selections they've made — set per answer option, from a question's **⋮ → Logic** menu. **Note**: This feature requires some planning, and should be written out on paper before constructing an online form. - [Learn more about Question Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/) ## Conditional Display Conditional Display shows or hides questions and ordinary pages on the current page according to earlier answers. It supports choice questions, ratings and scales, Matrix and NPS, with options for combining multiple conditions. - [Learn more about Conditional Display](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/conditional-display/) ### Qualification Questions By applying Logic in this way, you can disqualify participants from completing your form based on any information they give you. This is particularly useful if you only want to collect results from a target audience or focus group, as you’ll avoid sifting through piles of irrelevant data. Respondents will also appreciate this, as they won’t be wasting time filling out a form where their results aren’t useful. - [How to Create Qualification Questions](/build/forms/how-to-create-qualification-questions/) ### Consent Pages Consent Pages work similarly to Qualification Questions, as you’d essentially be disqualifying all those who do not give consent. We would suggest that you include this page at the beginning of your form, to avoid wasting the time of your respondents or gathering data you won’t need. - [Create a Consent Page](/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/) ### Information Request Forms Equally, you could use Logic to supply respondents with methods of providing further information regarding an answer option they’ve selected. E.g. if the purpose of your form is to collect customer feedback, you would include a question such as ‘were you happy with our level of service?’. If the customer was to say ‘no’, you may want more information regarding their experience and how your service could improve. You can use Logic to direct those ‘customers’ to a page created for that specific purpose. * * * Logic incorporates an element of intelligence into your form; which ultimately saves your respondents time in completing it, and saves you time in filtering out respondents that would provide irrelevant data. Using logic is likely to increase the completion rate of your form, as respondents will only see pages that are relevant to them, and are less likely to leave before finishing. --- # Can You Set Logic on Quizzes? https://docs.shout.com/build/logic-and-answer-piping/can-you-set-logic-on-quizzes/ Yes. [Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/about-logic/) — both [Question Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/) and [Page Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/) — is fully available when building a Quiz-type form, exactly as it is on a Survey. Open the **Form** tab for your quiz and click the **Question logic** tab to set a page's default destination, or expand any question's **⋮** menu and choose **Logic** to send respondents down different paths depending on which answer they pick. This works whether or not that answer is also being scored for the quiz. One quiz-specific difference to be aware of: a Quiz's default Exit page is a **Marking** page (a Score/Marking page type, showing the respondent's final score) rather than a plain "Thank you" page. If you use Logic to route some respondents to a different Exit page, remember that page won't show a score unless you also set its [Exit page type](/build/pages/exit-and-thank-you-pages/) to **Score/Marking page**. --- # Conditional Display https://docs.shout.com/build/logic-and-answer-piping/conditional-display/ Conditional display lets you show or hide a question or page based on answers a respondent has already given. It is useful when a follow-up is relevant only to part of your audience — for example, asking attendees about product strategy only when they chose that workshop track. Conditional display works alongside [Page Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/) and [Question Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/): - **Conditional display** controls what is visible on the current page. - **Page Logic** and **Question Logic** control which page the respondent goes to next. ## Add a display condition 1. Put the source question before the question or page you want to show or hide. Sources must come earlier in the form. 2. Open the **⋮** menu beside the target question or page. 3. Select **Display conditions**. ![The question menu with Display conditions available](/help-images/conditional-display/conditional-display-menu.png) 4. Choose **Show** or **Hide**. 5. Choose the earlier question to use as the source. 6. Choose an operator, then choose the answer options or score range that should trigger the rule. Changes save automatically. The editor also shows the rule as a sentence, so you can check that it reads the way you intended. ![A saved choice-based display condition in the Logic tab](/help-images/conditional-display/conditional-display-editor.png) ## Choose how the rule matches Add another **Condition** when a target depends on more than one answer. When there are multiple conditions, choose whether to match: - **all conditions** — every condition must be true; - **any condition** — at least one condition must be true. An unfinished condition is marked as incomplete and is not saved as an active rule. Remove it or finish choosing its options before relying on the target being conditional. ## Available sources and operators You can use these question types as sources: - Multi-Choice (Single Select), Dropdown and Binary questions; - Multi-Choice (Multi Select) and Multiselect Dropdown questions; - Star Rating, Opinion Scale, Opinion Slider, Multi-Factor Scale, Multi-Factor Opinion Slider and NPS questions; - Matrix questions. Text, date and other question types cannot currently be used as display-condition sources. For choice questions, the available operators depend on the question type: - Single-choice sources can **is** or **is not** one of the options. - Multiple-choice sources can have **any**, **all** or **none** of the selected options. - Any supported source can be tested for **is answered** or **is not answered**. Rating and scale questions use an inclusive **scores between** range. If the source has multiple rows, select the row first. Matrix conditions use a row when needed and then one or more of the Matrix's scale columns. ![A display condition using a 4–5 inclusive rating range](/help-images/conditional-display/conditional-display-rating-range.png) ## What respondents see Display conditions are recalculated as respondents answer the form. A hidden required question does not prevent them from continuing. If a respondent changes an earlier answer and a follow-up becomes hidden, its answer is cleared. If the follow-up appears again later, it starts unanswered rather than restoring the previous answer. Conditional display does not send respondents to another page. Use skip logic when you need to route them to a different page, an information request, a qualification outcome or an Exit page. ## Important limitations - A question can use only an earlier question as its source. A page can depend only on questions on earlier pages. - A Question Page can be conditional when its contents support conditional display. Exit pages and pages containing protected items such as Payment, File Upload, Signature, Restart, Hidden or Consent cannot be conditional. - If you move a target before its source, or change or remove a source option, review the affected conditions in the **Logic** tab. --- # Question Logic https://docs.shout.com/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/ ## What is Question Logic? This type of Logic allows you to direct respondents to separate pages according to their answer selections. Question Logic is for sending respondents to another page based on their answer. It does not hide questions on the current page. If you want to show or hide a question or page in place, use [Conditional Display](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/conditional-display/). :::note **Note**: Question Logic is not triggered as soon as a respondent selects an answer, it is triggered when they click Next Page (for **Many per page** forms) or move to the next question (for **One per page** forms). ::: ## Question Logic Menu ![](/help-images/default-logic/file-H5U3Ep3vLW.png) Open the **Form** tab in the builder and click the **Question logic** tab in the sidebar to see this view for your form. It lists every page in order, with its **Default end of page skip to** destination at the top, followed by any question on that page that already has Question Logic applied to it — click **Show question logic** to expand one and see the per-answer destinations. Pages with none simply read "No questions with logic". ## How to apply Question Logic 1. Open the **Form** tab 2. Click the **⋮** icon next to your question 3. Select **Logic**![](/help-images/default-logic/file-nCw1pKfHvJ.png) 4. Open the dropdown beneath one of your answer options 5. Select a page — only pages that come after the current one, or an Exit page, are offered ## Suggested uses for Question Logic Question Logic is essential for those who require maximum control over the data being collected. This is to say that, you can use this type of Logic to set ' [Qualification Questions](/build/forms/how-to-create-qualification-questions/)’, which are designed to filter out respondents who would provide data/ results which are of no use to you. There are a few other features that can be used in tandem with Logic to further improve your form. You can employ Question Logic to [create a consent form or page](/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/) by which respondents are allowed access to the rest of the form if they give consent, or are taken to a ‘Thank You’ page if they refuse. Equally, you could use Question Logic to create Information Request Forms, where you ask respondents for more information regarding an answer selection. ## Tips for Using Question Logic - To ensure clarity when using the Question Logic interfaces, we’d recommend you give each [page a unique title](/build/pages/page-titles-and-descriptions/). This is because you’ll be asked to select a page to direct respondents to, and titles will allow you to identify the correct page more easily. - Plan out Question Logic on paper before creating an online form, this way the separate paths and pages will be much clearer and easier to create. --- # Page Logic https://docs.shout.com/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/ ## What is Page Logic? Page Logic allows you to set the next page respondents should see once they finish the one they're on, i.e. where they go when they click 'Next Page'. It's shown in the builder as **Default end of page skip to:**, and is used as the destination for any respondent who doesn't trigger a more specific Question Logic rule on that page. **Example**: ![](/help-images/page-logic/question-logic-tab-overview.png) You'll see a setup similar to this when you click the **Question logic** tab in the Form builder's sidebar. It lists every page in your form, in order, along with: - **Default end of page skip to:** — the Page Logic destination for that page. Defaults to "Next Page (Default)". - Below that, any question on the page that has Question Logic applied — click **Show question logic** to expand it and see each answer's destination. Pages with none simply read "No questions with logic". In the image above, "Did you enjoy your visit?" has Question Logic applied to its "No" answer, sending those respondents straight to the "More Details" page — skipping "Feedback" entirely. Since nothing overrides it, everyone else (anyone who picks "Yes") falls through to that question's page-level Page Logic, "Next Page (Default)", and carries on to "Feedback" as normal. Note: If no Page Logic is applied to a page, respondents are sent to the next chronological page as listed in the **Show all** tab. ## How to apply Page Logic? **Note**: We recommend that you give each page a unique title, so there’s no confusion when you come to applying Logic. 1. Open the **Form** tab and click the **Question logic** tab in the sidebar 2. Find the page whose default destination you want to change 3. Open its **Default end of page skip to:** dropdown ![](/help-images/page-logic/default-end-of-page-dropdown.png) 4. Select a destination — any page placed after the current one in your form, or one of your Exit pages 5. Your choice saves automatically If you also want specific answers to override this default for particular respondents, add [Question Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/) to those answers from the **Show all** tab instead — Page Logic only decides where everyone *else* goes. ## Important Notes for Using Logic - Exit/Thank You pages will not be listed alongside Question Pages in the **Question logic** tab. If you need to visit and edit these, use the **Show all** tab. - Page Logic (and Question Logic) cannot send respondents to pages that are placed chronologically before them in the **Show all** tab, e.g. Page 1 can send respondents to Page 2 or Page 3, but Page 2 can only send respondents to Page 3 and not to Page 1. For this reason, we’d suggest planning your form on paper before starting, if you intend to use a substantial amount of Page Logic. - Question Logic overrides Page Logic if they conflict. --- # Why is there no previous page button? https://docs.shout.com/build/logic-and-answer-piping/previous-page-button/ If your form has more than one page, your respondents have access to both the **Next Page** and **Previous Page** buttons. This is true even on pages reached via [Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/about-logic/) branching — clicking Previous Page takes respondents back to whichever page they actually came from, with their previous answers preserved, and doesn't re-trigger Question Logic unless they click Next Page again. If you're not seeing a Previous Page button, it's most likely because: - Your form only has one page — with nowhere to go back to, the button isn't shown. - You're on the very first page of the form. There's currently no builder setting to hide the Previous Page button beyond that. If you need respondents unable to revisit an earlier page (for example, to stop them changing a consent answer after the fact), design that page as a one-way step using Logic rather than relying on the navigation buttons — [About Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/about-logic/) explains how. --- # Text Piping https://docs.shout.com/build/logic-and-answer-piping/text-piping/ The term ‘Text Piping’ refers to the ability to insert information into a section of your form, that has been collected by a previous question or an external source. In the builder, this feature is labelled **Insert Dynamic Text** — you'll find it behind the **{ }** icon in a question's toolbar. The majority of other form building providers only allow you to pipe text into a question. However, we have extended this service to enable text piping into an answer option too. ## Piping text into questions There are numerous reasons you may want to pipe text into a question, from personalizing your form for each respondent, to creating a clear line of questioning. I.e. If you ask your respondents what brand of soda they drink, you can ‘pipe’ the text from their answer choice into any following related question. _E.g._ **Question 1**: Which brand of soda do you prefer? - a) Coca-Cola - b) Fanta - c) Sprite - d) Pepsi **Question 2**: What do you think of Pepsi? If a respondent selected ‘Pepsi’, you may then ask them what they think of this brand. To personalize the follow-up question for this respondent, you would pipe the ‘Pepsi’ text from the answer field into the chosen question field. Alternatively, you could use Text Piping to transfer a respondent’s name into a question to improve the relational/ engagement aspects of your form. ## Piping text into answer options You may also want to pipe text from a respondent’s previous answer selection into a follow-up question’s answer field. _E.g_: 1. What is the name of your Project Manager? -> Carol 2. Who is your Office Manager? -> Brian 3. If you had a complaint, who would you feel most comfortable talking to? a) Carol b) Brian c) Neither Carol or Brian d) Either, no preference Several instances of Text Piping are occurring in the example above. ‘Carol’ and ‘Brian’, in (1.) and (2.), represent the answers given by respondents for the first two questions. These custom answers are then piped into (3.) as options (a.) and (b.). You may notice that you are also able to pipe previous answers from both questions into the same answer option for a question, as illustrated by (c.). This allows you to make your forms as relevant as possible to any respondents. ## How do I use Text Piping? You will need at least two questions for Text Piping to work. The first question provides the text to be ‘piped’ (the Source), which can then be incorporated into the second (the Target). Click into the target question's text (or an answer option), then click the **{ }** icon in the item toolbar to open **Insert Dynamic Text**. You'll be asked "Where should the text come from?" with three options: 1. Previous answers 2. Contact details 3. External data ### Previous answers This option pipes text from a previous question's answer to a question or answer field of your choice. Once you've selected **Previous answers**, you'll be presented with a **Select a previous question** drop-down listing all your previous questions. The question you choose determines which answers can be piped into your new field. **Note**: The dialog reminds you to use **required** questions from **previous pages** to avoid inserting empty text — a One per page form makes this easier to keep track of, since only one question is answered at a time. There are some question types that contain several sub-questions, such as a [Matrix (Common Scale)](/build/questions/matrix-common-scale/) or [Text Boxes (Multiple)](/build/questions/text-box-multiple/). Choosing one of these reveals a second **Select a sub-question** drop-down, from which you can select your preferred sub-question. Once you click Done, the piped value is inserted as a small highlighted chip inline with your text (e.g. `Q7441480`) rather than raw code — you don't need to write or edit any syntax yourself, and inserting or reordering other questions won't break the reference. However, if you move a Text Piping-optimized question out of the necessary sequence, the corresponding pipe will break. - _E.g._ If Question A is piping text to Question B, Question A will always have to appear BEFORE Question B. **Note**: We’d recommend that you create and organize all your questions before incorporating Text Piping. This will make it easier to visualize where you’d like to pipe text from and to. ### Contact details This option pipes information from a respondent's record in your [Contacts](/contacts/) list — useful when you distribute your form by emailing a mailing list, since Shout already knows who each link was sent to. **Note**: The dialog warns you to ensure campaign tracking is enabled when mailing your campaign, or the placeholders will come through empty. The **Select contact detail** drop-down offers considerably more fields than just name and email, including: **name**, **last_name**, **email**, **custom**, **company**, **address_line_1**, **address_line_2**, **city**, **state**, **post_code**, **country**, **phone_number**, **language**, and **nps**. ### External data This option allows you to pipe text from **Hidden Fields** using a URL parameter or the JavaScript API. These terms simply refer to the way of creating applications that access the features or data of other digital services. You would be using this component to retrieve relevant data on your respondents, from a source external to this site. #### Step One: Defining your Data Before you can incorporate this type of Text Piping, you'll need to define what kind of data you want ‘passed in’ to your form. To do this, add a question of type **External Datasource (hidden questions)** — found under the "Special" group when you click **+ Question** — to your page (it still shows up in the sidebar simply as "Hidden Fields"). Type in the exact names of the fields you want to capture (e.g. `name`, `email_address`), matching how they'll be sent, and use **Add another field** for more than one. All data is stored as a string, and this item is never shown to respondents. **Note**: Field names must contain no spaces, and only `-` or `_` as special characters. #### Step Two: Passing the data in There are two ways to ‘pass data in’ to your form from an external source: URL parameters on your form's public link, or the JavaScript API. #### URL Parameters The in-builder guidance shows this as a simple query parameter matching your field name directly, e.g. appending `?name=Jeff` to your form's link would fill a Hidden Field named `name` with "Jeff". If you're linking out from a mail campaign instead, Shout's own [Contact details](#contact-details) piping (above) is usually simpler than passing data through the URL by hand. #### JavaScript API This method allows you to embed your form directly into your website — a good alternative when the standard embed codes don't fully suit your requirements. It requires a basic understanding of JavaScript. For the exact config shape and worked examples, see [Hidden Fields (API)](/build/surveys/hidden-fields-api/) — the builder's own "read our guide" link (next to the Hidden Fields item) points here too. ### Step Three: Using the data in the live form (optional) The data stored by either of the above methods can be used in your live form, through the Hidden Fields item discussed in Step One. ### Step Four: Passing the data out in a redirect URL (optional) You can pass information back to your website for confirmation that a respondent has completed your form. To do this, open your [Exit Page](/build/pages/exit-and-thank-you-pages/) in the builder and set its **Exit page type** to **Redirect to web address**. You'll be asked for a **Redirect URL** and a **Page Title**, plus a **Test link** button to check it. You can build the redirect URL to include one of your external data fields' values so your own site can read it back — see [Hidden Fields (API)](/build/surveys/hidden-fields-api/) for the exact syntax. --- # Exit and Thank You Pages https://docs.shout.com/build/pages/exit-and-thank-you-pages/ These are the last [Pages](/build/pages/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/) that respondents will see before they exit your form. They're simply a way to thank respondents for their time, and/or inform them of their disqualification. A Thank You page will automatically be included in your form, but you are able to delete, replace, and edit this. (Quiz-type forms get a default exit page called "Marking" instead, set to the Score/Marking page type described below.) When you add an Exit Page it defaults to **Standard (with advertising)**. Open its **Exit page type** dropdown to switch to one of these: - **Standard (with advertising)**: Contains only a thank you message and your logo (if you inserted one), plus a small "Create your own interactive content with Shout.com" advert. - **Design custom page**: This allows you to insert any content blocks (headings, images, embeds, and more) onto the Exit Page. - **Redirect to web address**: Sends respondents who finish your form to a predetermined location. - **Score/Marking page**: Only shown as an option on Quiz-type forms. Shows respondents a final score, with a **Score display** setting (Page totals or Individual question scores) and an optional **Feedback text** toggle. ## To Insert an Exit/ Thank You Page ![](/help-images/exit-and-thank-you-pages/file-vge9JcCqM4.png) 1. Go to the Form tab 2. Click the **⋮** icon next to any page title (or use the **+ Page** shortcut underneath it) 3. Select 'Add page' 4. Choose 'Exit Page' ## Change the Type of Exit Page ![](/help-images/exit-and-thank-you-pages/file-N4hkerglkf.png) 1. Open the Form tab 2. Navigate to your Exit page by clicking its title in the Exit pages list 3. Open the **Exit page type** dropdown that appears under the title in the sidebar panel 4. Select a new Exit page type. ### Deleting Pages ![](/help-images/exit-and-thank-you-pages/file-E39cs0Gyih.png) 1. Go to the Form tab 2. Click the ⋮ icon next to any page title 3. Select 'Delete page' 4. Confirm your selection in the "Are you sure you want to delete this page and its contents?" dialog Deleting a page will remove all its contents from your form, including any questions on it. The 'Delete page' option is disabled while it's the only page of its kind (Question or Exit) in the form — add a second one first if you need to remove it. :::caution **Note**: The confirmation dialog warns that this cannot be undone. ::: ## Disqualification Pages By using Page Logic, you can create qualification questions that determine whether a respondent will be required to complete your entire form. The disqualification pages are those that respondents are sent to if respondents do not qualify. You could direct all respondents to a singular Thank You page, or send them to individual pages — if you add more than one Exit page, the builder shows a reminder that "Only one exit page will be displayed, you can choose which dynamically using logic." See the links below for more information on how to achieve this: - [How to Create Qualification Questions](/build/forms/how-to-create-qualification-questions/) - [About Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/about-logic/) - [Page Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/) - [Default Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/) --- # How to Add and Manage Pages & Sections https://docs.shout.com/build/pages/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/ Pages and sections allow you to break your survey questions up for respondents. Whether they're called Pages or Sections depends on the **Questions per page** setting you chose when creating the form: - **Many per page** — they're called Pages. - **One per page** — they're called Sections. ## Adding more Pages & Sections There are two types of pages you can insert into a form: - **Question Pages/ Sections**: You will have access to all Standard Questions, Multi-Factor Questions, Picture Choice Questions, Presentational Items, and to some Contact Detail Questions. - **Exit Pages/ Sections**: Used to thank respondents for their time, provide a reward or promotion, or redirect them to a web address. ### Adding Question Pages/ Sections To add a new question page, use whichever is quicker: ![Add Question Pages](/help-images/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/file-vKVFu1g1xU.png) - Click the **+ Page** (or **+ Section**) shortcut underneath any page in the Form tab, then choose 'Question Page'. - Or click the **⋮** icon next to any page title, select 'Add page', then choose 'Question Page'. ### Adding Exit Pages/ Sections To add a new exit page: ![Add Exit Pages](/help-images/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/file-vge9JcCqM4.png) 1. Open the Form tab 2. Click the **⋮** icon next to any page title (or use the **+ Page** shortcut underneath it) 3. Click 'Add page' 4. Select 'Exit Page' ## Changing Page/ Section Order The order that pages are put in determines the route respondents take through your survey. You are able to re-order these pages to change the order in which participants see them: ![Reorder Pages](/help-images/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/file-hTuOh9iK1X.png) 1. Open the Form tab 2. Click the ⋮ icon next to any page title 3. Select 'Reorder pages' (only enabled once there's more than one page/section of that kind) 4. Drag and drop the page to a new place in the page order pop up, then click Done ![](/help-images/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/file-hmzhErMcpM.png) **Note**: Moving pages will affect any [Page Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/)/ [Default Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/) you've set up. We would recommend applying Logic AFTER you've ordered your pages. The same **⋮** menu also has 'Show page skip logic' (jumps straight to that page's logic view) and 'Hide in progress bar' (excludes the page from the visual step indicator respondents see) — both are per-page toggles you can flip any time. ## Deleting Pages/ Sections 1. Open the Form tab 2. Click the **⋮** icon next to the page you want to delete 3. Select 'Delete page' 4. Confirm your choice in the "Are you sure you want to delete this page and its contents?" dialog Deleting a page will remove all its contents from your form, including any questions on it. **Note**: 'Delete page' is disabled while it's the only Question Page or Exit Page in the form — add a second one of that kind before you can remove one. Once deleted, it cannot be recovered. --- # Page Titles and Descriptions https://docs.shout.com/build/pages/page-titles-and-descriptions/ These text fields will provide respondents with information on the page they're filling out. The page title encapsulates the overall subject of the questions, whilst the description — labelled **subheading** in the page toolbar — can detail the line of questioning or instructions for that set of questions. ## Insert a Page Title 1. Open a form 2. Click the 'Enter page title' box at the top of the page 3. Type your title ## Insert a Page Description 1. Open a form 2. Click the **Add subheading** button (next to 'Add logo', above the page title) 3. Type your description into the 'Enter subheading' box that appears below the title ## Removing Titles or Descriptions Click into either text field and delete the text as you would any other text. --- # What are Pages? https://docs.shout.com/build/pages/pages/ ## What are Pages? Pages can be used to break down a long list of questions into smaller organized sections. This will not only improve your respondents experience in completing your form but also in making your editing process clearer. ## How to add a new Page ![Add New Pages](/help-images/pages/file-7j9pnra5ky.png) 1. Open the Form tab 2. Click the **+ Page** shortcut underneath any existing page (or click the **⋮** icon next to a page title and select 'Add page') 3. Select 'Question Page' OR 'Exit Page' For a little more info on this, go to [Add and Manage Pages](/build/pages/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/). ### Question Pages These page options are intended to contain your questions, where you will have access to all [Question Types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/), [Presentational Items](/build/text-images-and-video/list-of-presentational-items/), and some [Contact Detail Elements](/build/questions/contact-details-element-types/). **Note**: When [making a quiz](/build/quizzes/how-to-make-a-quiz/), you will have a slightly shorter list of available items. This is because not all question types or items would be suitable for a point-based system, like quizzes. There are also a few other things you can accomplish with this option. Here’s a list of examples: - Question Page - Introductory Page - [Contact Form](/build/questions/contact-form-element/) - [Consent Form](/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/) - Disclaimer Page ### Exit/ Thank You Pages [Exit/ Thank You Pages](/build/pages/exit-and-thank-you-pages/) are used to notify respondents that your form has come to an end, and to express gratitude for their time. There are several Exit Page types that you can switch between via the **Exit page type** dropdown. These are: - Standard (with advertising) - Design custom page - Redirect to web address - Score/Marking page (Quizzes only) The Standard type will permit you to edit the page title and subheading text, allowing for a short thank-you message to be displayed to your respondents. You will be able to insert content blocks into your Thank You Page if you choose to design a custom page — type "/" where it says "Type / to add content block" to insert one. This option also includes the ability to edit the page title and subheading. Finally, you can redirect respondents to a web address of your choice: enter it into the **Redirect URL** field, optionally set a custom **Page Title**, and use the **Test link** button to confirm it works. ## Navigating between Pages Click any page title in the Form tab to switch to that page: ![Switch Between Pages](/help-images/pages/file-cpeGJ0NiGy.png) ## Page Titles You can edit the title of all your pages by clicking the title field at the top of your survey, quiz, or form. ![](/help-images/pages/file-elSzKcNf4t.png) ## Page description You will find the option to add a page subheading below the page title (click the **Add subheading** button to reveal the "Enter subheading" field), where you will be able to insert any additional information concerning the corresponding page. ![](/help-images/pages/file-G2SuDAmBpJ.png) ## Logo If you’re a business or organization, you may want to include some [branding or imagery in your form](/build/text-images-and-video/adding-and-editing-logos/). By clicking the **Add logo** button, you will be given access to any images you have previously uploaded to the site, or you can upload a new one. ![](/help-images/pages/file-7CuaGQIzzA.png) If you have not uploaded any images yet, drop a file onto the panel or press **Browse for files**. ## How to delete a Page ![](/help-images/pages/file-E39cs0Gyih.png) 1. Open the Form tab in the left sidebar 2. Click the **⋮** icon next to the page you'd like to delete and select 'Delete page' 3. Confirm your choice OR 'Cancel' your action :::caution **Warning**: Clicking the ‘Delete Page’ button will remove a page from your form permanently. You will not be able to undo this action, or retrieve any of the information that was deleted with the page. ::: :::note **Note**: To be able to delete a Question Page or Exit Page, there must be more than one of each present. The ‘Delete page’ option is greyed out in the ⋮ menu before then. ::: ## Page Logic [Page Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/) allows you to direct different respondents to separate pages in your form, based on the answer choices they’ve made. You can use this feature to [create Qualification Questions/ Pages](/build/forms/how-to-create-qualification-questions/) and Consent Forms, which you can read more about by clicking the links. - [About Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/about-logic/) --- # Binary Yes/No Question https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/binary-question/ The Binary Yes/No question asks respondents to choose between two available answer choices. For example, Yes or No and True or False. ![Binary Question Type](/help-images/binary-question/file-Nv0DnzIwsU.png) ## How to add a Binary Yes/No Question ![Add a Binary Question](/help-images/binary-question/file-XCmsBToXq0.png)To add a Binary Yes/No question to your survey, form, or quiz: 1. Open the Form tab in the builder sidebar 2. Click 'Question' to open the question type picker 3. Under Standard Questions, select Binary Yes/No ## Changing Binary Icons By default, the Binary Yes/No question will contain the thumb up and thumb down icons (as seen above). But. you can switch these to two alternative icon sets via the Question Settings Bar. ### Tick and Cross Icon Set: ### ![Tick/Cross Icon Binary Question](/help-images/binary-question/file-X5Spmv9mbZ.png)Smiley and Frowny Face Icon Set: ![Smiley Face Icon Set Binary Question](/help-images/binary-question/file-ROSSWcZxr1.png) To change the icon set for the Binary Yes/No question type, follow these steps: 1. Click the Binary Yes/No question in the builder to expand its settings 2. Click 'Show more settings' if the Icon set option isn't already visible 3. Click the Icon set drop down and select an alternate icon set ![Change Icon Set For Binary Yes/No Question](/help-images/binary-question/file-RJpmt48M9W.png) ## Question Settings Bar for the Binary Question Clicking a question in the builder expands its settings directly beneath it in the outline panel. For the Binary Yes/No question these are: - **Required**: Make this question required, so that respondents must answer the question before moving onto the next page or submitting a response. - **Numbered**: When disabled, numbering will be removed from this question. - **Icon set**: Switch the icon set displayed for the Binary Yes/No question. Click 'Show more settings' to reveal this option. **Note**: There is no longer a per-question "Personal info" toggle. Instead, a form-wide **Pseudonymization** setting (Settings tab → Privacy & Security) separates personally identifiable information from the rest of your results across the whole form. --- # Comments/ Essay Boxes https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/comments-essay-boxes/ ## What are Comments/ Essay Boxes? ![Comment Box Question](/help-images/comments-essay-boxes/comments-essay-box-default.png) Respondents can enter a determinable amount of text, in response to your set question or statement. They are designed to provide your participants with space to express their thoughts and comments or write a short essay-style answer to a question. ## Why include a Comment Box/ Essay Box? Comment/ Essay boxes allow respondents to form longer, open-ended responses. Therefore, they’re more suitable for questions that require a more detailed answer. ## How do I create a Comment/ Essay Box? ![](/help-images/comments-essay-boxes/file-kEsI12GLi7.png) 1. Open the Form tab in the builder sidebar 2. Click 'Question' to open the question type picker 3. Under Standard Questions, select Comments / Essay box 4. Enter your question **Note**: This question appears as "Comments / Essay box" in the question picker, but is labelled "Textarea" once inserted into your form outline. Default Settings The text box will be set to manage four rows of text by default. You can increase, or decrease, the number of rows using the slider in the question's settings panel (click 'Show more settings' to reveal it). You can allow for between one and ten lines of text. There will also be no ‘Input Limitation’ set by default, but this can be changed in the same panel. Prefix and Postfix text fields are also available here, letting you display fixed text immediately before or after the response box. ## Tips - These question types are great for providing agency to respondents, especially if they feel they have more to say. However, a large number of text boxes can be mentally taxing. - Your question should demand a straightforward answer, or participants will become confused. - Specify what type of information you need to be input into the box, e.g. if you’ve set the box to only accept email addresses, make respondents aware of this. ## Question Settings Bar Clicking a question in the builder expands its settings directly beneath it. For Comments/ Essay Boxes these are: - **Required**: This option will appear as a toggle, which can be enabled or disabled. When enabled, it will force respondents to complete the question before they can finish the survey or quiz. When disabled, participants will be able to skip any question. By default, this setting will be inactive. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Link to Contact detail**: Choose a contact field to link all responses for this question to, and update the contact record automatically. A 'Manage contact fields' button next to it lets you add new custom contact fields. - **Text rows**: Customize the size of the textbox (1–10 rows), and therefore the amount of text a respondent can input. - **Prefix / Postfix**: Optional fixed text displayed immediately before or after the response box. - **Input Limitation**: Control what type of information participants can input. Toggle between ‘None’ (no Input Limitation), ‘Numeric’, ‘Email’, ‘Web Address’, ‘Telephone Number’, and ‘Custom’. **Note**: There is no longer a per-question "Personal info" toggle. Instead, a form-wide **Pseudonymization** setting (Settings tab → Privacy & Security) separates personally identifiable information from the rest of your results across the whole form. ## How respondents interact with Comment/ Essay boxes? An empty text field will be present beneath your set question or statement. Respondents can fill this space with their answer or comment. **Note**: Press SHIFT + ENTER to start a new line of text, and just ENTER when done. ## How to analyze the Report The responses for Comments/ Essay Boxes will be listed under ‘Text Responses’ in your [Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/) (the Results tab, previously called the Quick Report). They will be ordered from the newest response at the top of the list to the oldest response at the bottom. For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-quiz-results/) - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # List of Contact Details Elements https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/contact-details-element-types/ A respondent’s demographic information can be as essential to analyzing your project results as the question responses themselves. Depending on what you wish to accomplish with your project, you could use this information to develop your understanding of your respondents, or simply compile a customer database. In the builder, click 'Question' to open the question type picker — Contact Details questions are grouped in their own category, with a description that these questions update the contact record and prefill when details are known: - Address Lookup - Compact Contact Form - Full Name - Telephone number - Email address - Language **Note**: A dedicated standalone "Web Address" element is no longer offered in this category. To collect a URL, add a Text Box (single) question and set its Input Limitation to 'Web Address' — see [Text Box (single)](/build/questions/text-box-single/). Each of these questions can be linked to a field on the respondent's contact record via the 'Link to Contact detail' setting, so that answers prefill automatically when the respondent is already known and update the CRM contact when submitted. If a contact field is already linked elsewhere in your form, that option is hidden from the picker to avoid duplicate links. ## [Compact Contact Form](/build/questions/contact-form-element/) ![Contact Form](/help-images/contact-details-element-types/compact-contact-form-default.png)This is the multi-field option, used to collect a range of personal information from respondents in one question. By default it includes: - First Name, Last name - Email Address - Company - Phone Number (with country code selector) - Zip/ Postal Code - Address, Address 2, City/Town, State/Province, Country (revealed after an address lookup or by clicking 'Manual entry') Each field is individually editable and linked to its own contact field. **Note**: If you do intend on collecting respondent information, you may want to inform participants of the reason you are doing so. Alternatively, a [Consent Form](/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/) could be included in your project to gain permission to collect this sensitive information. ## Address Lookup ![Address Lookup Form](/help-images/contact-details-element-types/address-lookup-default.png)This method of collecting contact information focusses solely on the location of your respondents. By default, respondents are shown only a 'Zip/ Postal Code' field with a search icon. Clicking the search icon looks up the address; alternatively, respondents can click the 'Manual entry' link to reveal the full set of fields: - Address - Address 2 - City/ Town - State/ Province - Zip/ Postal Code - Country ## [Email address](/build/questions/email-address-field/) ![Email Address Field](/help-images/contact-details-element-types/email-address-default.png)The aim of this question is to collect an email address from respondents, to be stored with the rest of your results. Email addresses are a valuable marketing tool for engaging audiences and promoting your products or services. On top of this, email is likely to be the preferred form of contact for a lot of respondents. By default this question is already linked to the contact record's Email address field. ## Full Name / Telephone number / Language These are single-field Contact Details questions, added the same way as Address Lookup and Email address above — pick them from the Contact Details category in the question picker. Each inserts one field (a name box, a phone number box with country code selector, or a language drop-down respectively) pre-linked to the matching contact field. --- # Contact Form Element https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/contact-form-element/ ## What is a Contact Form? ![](/help-images/contact-form-element/file-DdmrToVGPL.png)This question type is now labelled **Compact Contact Form** in the question picker (it still appears in the builder outline as "Contact Details"). It is designed to collect a range of personal information from respondents in one question. This information is usually comprised of: - First Name, Last name - Email Address - Company - Phone Number (with country code selector) - Zip Code/ Postcode - Address, Address 2, City/Town, State/Province, Country (shown after an address lookup or 'Manual entry') You will be able to chop and change what information is required from respondents. ## Why use the Contact Form? Using the Contact Form, you can collect all the personal information on your respondents you may need. Participants may be hesitant to give up this information, so it's probably best to inform them of what your intent to do with their information. **Tip**: If you intend to use this information for purposes other than collating respondent demographic information, you may also want to include a [Consent Form](/build/forms/how-to-create-a-consent-form/) in your project. ## How to Create a Contact Form ![](/help-images/contact-form-element/file-urPJlp2hQV.png) 1. Create a Survey or Quiz 2. Go to the Form tab in the sidebar 3. Click 'Question' to open the question type picker 4. Under Contact Details, select Compact Contact Form ## Default Settings The default settings for the Compact Contact Form will display several text boxes when the question type is inserted. These include: - First Name, Last name - Email Address - Company - Phone Number (with country code selector) - Zip Code/ Postcode - Address, Address 2, City/Town, State/Province, Country (shown after an address lookup or 'Manual entry') Each text box aims to collect a separate, and relevant, piece of information about your respondents, and each is linked to a matching field on the respondent's contact record via a "Link to Contact detail" badge next to it. To rename these sections, simply click the text box and replace the text. ## Question Settings Bar Clicking the question in the builder expands its settings directly beneath it: - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Zip/ postcode lookup**: This toggle allows respondents to search for their address using a Zip Code/ Postal Code. This feature is only available in the UK and US. - **Save to contacts / Manage contact group**: Responses to this question are automatically saved as CRM contacts. Click 'Manage contact group' to choose which contact group new contacts should be added to. **Note**: There is no longer a per-question "Personal info" toggle. Instead, a form-wide **Pseudonymization** setting (Settings tab → Privacy & Security) separates personally identifiable information from the rest of your results across the whole form. ## How respondents interact with the Contact Form Participants will be able to fill out each section of the contact form in the same way as Text Box (Single) questions. If the Zip/postcode lookup feature is active, respondents will be able to click the search icon next to the Zip/Postal Code field and select their address, or click 'Manual entry' to fill in the address fields directly. Their address will then autofill into the corresponding fields. ## How to analyze the Contact Form Report Contact details will be compiled as a list of text responses in your [Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/) (the Results tab, previously called the Quick Report). They will be presented in the order they were collected for easy reference. --- # Date Range https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/date-range/ This question type allows you to collect a date range from respondents, e.g. **FROM:** 27th August 2020 - **TO:** 3rd September 2020. ![Date Range Question](/help-images/date-range/date-range-default.png) **Note**: Date Range question types can be used in quizzes, but points cannot be applied. ## How are dates formatted? Respondents will see a date format based on the language settings of their device. However, all dates collected will be converted to the preferred date format of your own device when you view your results. ## Default Settings When you insert a Date Range question type, two text fields — each with a calendar icon that opens a date picker on click — are shown side by side. You can add a field for respondents to enter a time with each date from the question settings. ![](/help-images/date-range/file-aeeyayQoTh.png) The text fields will say 'From' and 'To' by default. These can be edited like any other text field. ## Adding A Date Range Question Type ![](/help-images/date-range/file-1uKx6BCClX.png) 1. Open the Form tab in the builder sidebar 2. Click 'Question' to open the question type picker 3. Under Standard Questions, select Date Range 4. Enter a Question/ Instructions 5. _(Optional)_ Click a text field to edit the field text 6. (_Optional_) Add a Time Field from the question's settings panel ### Can you remove one of the calendars? No, this is not possible. You should consider using the [Date](/build/questions/date/) question type. ## Question Settings Bar Clicking the question in the builder expands its settings directly beneath it. For Date Range questions these are: - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Link 'start' date to contact field**: Pass the FROM date collected by this question to a contact field in your CRM. - **Collect time with date**: Add a time field next to the 'From' date field, in which respondents can enter a time. - **Link 'end' date to contact field**: Pass the TO date collected by this question to a contact field in your CRM. **Note**: There is no longer a per-question "Personal info" toggle. Instead, a form-wide **Pseudonymization** setting (Settings tab → Privacy & Security) separates personally identifiable information from the rest of your results across the whole form. ## Analyzing Date Ranges in the Report ![Date Range Format](/help-images/date-range/file-H2f56ObGbe.jpg) Date Range results will be stored as text responses in your Report (the Results tab, previously called the Quick Report), as seen in the picture above. The date/time on the left will be the FROM date, whilst the data on the right represents the TO date. They will appear in the order that they were submitted by respondents, from top to bottom. --- # Date https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/date/ These question types allow you to collect a singular date from respondents. ![Date Question Type](/help-images/date/date-field-default.png) **Note**: Date question types can be used in quizzes, but points cannot be applied. ## How are dates formatted? Respondents will see a date format based on the language settings of their device. However, all dates collected will be converted to the preferred date format of your own device when you view your results. ## Default Settings When you insert a Date question type, a single text field (labelled 'Date' by default) is shown with a calendar icon. Clicking the field or the icon opens a date picker for the respondent to choose a date from. The text field will say 'Date' by default. This can be edited like any other text field. ## Adding A Date Question Type ![](/help-images/date/file-joAKCmRymh.png) 1. Open the Form tab in the builder sidebar 2. Click 'Question' to open the question type picker 3. Under Standard Questions, select Date 4. _(Optional)_ Click the text field to edit the field text 5. (_Optional_) Add a Time Field from the question's settings panel ## Adding a Time Field to Date Questions You can add a field for respondents to enter a time with the date from the question settings. ![](/help-images/date/file-aeeyayQoTh.png) 1. Click the Date question in the builder to expand its settings (click 'Show more settings' if needed) 2. Toggle the 'Collect time with date' switch to 'On' A time field (showing '00 : 00') will now be present next to the date field. ## Question Settings Bar Clicking the question in the builder expands its settings directly beneath it. For Date questions these are: - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Link date to Contact detail**: Pass any response data collected by this question to a contact field in your CRM. A 'Manage contact fields' button next to it lets you add new custom contact fields. - **Collect time with date**: Add a time field next to the date text field, in which respondents can enter a time. **Note**: There is no longer a per-question "Personal info" toggle. Instead, a form-wide **Pseudonymization** setting (Settings tab → Privacy & Security) separates personally identifiable information from the rest of your results across the whole form. ## Analyzing Dates in the Report ![Date Format](/help-images/date/file-NSSmGH4iPR.jpg) Dates will be stored as text responses in your Report (the Results tab, previously called the Quick Report), as seen in the picture above. They will appear in the order that they were submitted by respondents, from top to bottom. --- # Drop Down List https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/drop-down-list/ ## What are Drop Down Lists? ![Drop-Down List Question](/help-images/drop-down-list/file-GZbMAGfYQe.jpg) These question types are similar to the [Multi-Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-single-select/); where a list of options is provided for respondents to choose from, in relation to a question or statement. However, instead of a list of answers directly beneath the question, the answers are hidden in an expandable drop-down box. ## Why use Drop Down Lists? These boxes are useful in concealing considerably longer lists of answer options. If your list of answer options is too long, the flow of your project will be affected. E.g. In a contact form, it may be necessary to obtain the location or address of a respondent and Drop Down Lists allow you to include a large list of places without overcrowding the page. ## How do I create a Drop Down Lists? ![How To Add A Drop Down List To A Survey](/help-images/drop-down-list/file-sKHgYO1Xew.png) 1. Open the Form tab in the builder sidebar 2. Click 'Question' to open the question type picker 3. Under Standard Questions, select Drop Down List 4. Click the drop-down field in the canvas to open the options editor ![Drop Down List default options editor](/help-images/drop-down-list/drop-down-options-modal.png) ## Default Settings Two blank 'Option text' boxes will be provided according to the default settings of this question type, inside the options editor shown above. Click '+ OPTION' to create additional answer boxes, or '+ "OTHER" TEXT' to insert an 'Other' answer option. A 'Choose from preset list options' drop-down at the top of the editor also lets you populate the list from a built-in preset (e.g. a list of countries) instead of typing options manually. When [making a quiz](/build/quizzes/how-to-make-a-quiz/), the answer options will all be assigned 0 points by default. You can [assign points to answers](/build/quizzes/how-to-apply-points-to-questions/) by clicking the relevant option, then entering the settings for that option and entering a number into the ‘Points’ box. ## Tips - Where it is sometimes useful to randomize the order of your answers, if you’re providing a list of locations (or a similar list) you may want to format it alphabetically, or in some other logical order. ## Question Settings Bar Clicking the question in the builder expands its settings directly beneath it. For Drop Down Lists these are: - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Link to Contact detail**: Choose a contact field to link this question's responses to, so answers prefill and update the contact record. - **"Other" text choice**: Allow respondents to write a free-form answer to your question. - **Randomize**: Randomize the order of answer options for each respondent. - **Multiple selections**: Set a Minimum and Maximum number of options a respondent may choose, turning the drop-down into a multi-select list. **Note**: There is no longer a per-question "Personal info" toggle. Instead, a form-wide **Pseudonymization** setting (Settings tab → Privacy & Security) separates personally identifiable information from the rest of your results across the whole form. ## How respondents interact with Drop Down Lists? A blank box marked with an arrow will sit below your set question, which respondents can click to reveal the full list of answer options. Whichever option their mouse hovers over will be highlighted, and their selected answer will then appear in the blank box below the question. ## How to analyze the Report Answer options will be displayed in their original order, from left to right, in the [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/) of your [Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/) (the Results tab, previously called the Quick Report). You will also receive stats on the standard deviation and the total number of responses for the question. By default, your results will appear as a Doughnut Chart, with each answer being assigned a color within the chart. It is possible to change the chart formatting through the Question Quick Menu for this section. The other available options for this question type are Line Graph, Column Graph, Radar Chart, Pie Chart. ### ‘Other’ Responses Any responses gathered through the ‘Other’ answer option will be recorded in the ‘Other’ section of the data table. If text was attached to any of those answers, each response will be recorded in the ‘Text Responses’ section under the graphs. For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-quiz-results/) - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Email Address Field https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/email-address-field/ ## What is an Email Address field? ![Email Address Field](/help-images/email-address-field/email-address-default.png) The aim of these fields is to collect an email address from respondents, to be stored with the rest of your results. ## Why use Email Address field? Email addresses are a valuable marketing tool and can be used to advertise or promote most any service or product. On top of this, email is likely to be the preferred form of contact for a lot of respondents. ## How to create an Email Address field? ![](/help-images/email-address-field/file-bLkRAw2KVw.png) 1. Go to the Builder 2. Open the Form tab in the sidebar 3. Click 'Question' to open the question type picker 4. Under Contact Details, select Email address 5. Title your field 6. Assign headings to text fields (if necessary) ## Default Settings The default settings for this question type will insert only one text field, alongside the question text space. The text box will have a textarea height of one line and will have the Email Input Limitation applied. It is also linked to the 'Email address' contact field by default, so it prefills and updates the CRM contact record automatically. These settings can all be edited through the question's settings panel. ## Question Settings Bar Clicking the question in the builder expands its settings directly beneath it: - **Required**: This option will appear as a toggle, which can be enabled or disabled. When enabled, it will force respondents to complete the question before they can finish the survey or quiz. When disabled, participants will be able to skip any question. By default, this setting will be inactive. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Link to Contact detail**: Choose a contact field to link all responses for this question to. Set to 'Email address' by default. A 'Manage contact fields' button next to it lets you add new custom contact fields. - **Text rows**: Customize the size of the textbox, and therefore the amount of text a respondent can input. - **Prefix / Postfix**: Optional fixed text displayed immediately before or after the response box. - **Input Limitation**: Control what type of information participants can input. Toggle between ‘None’, ‘Numeric’, ‘Email’ (the default for this question type), ‘Web Address’, ‘Telephone Number’, and ‘Custom’. **Note**: There is no longer a per-question "Personal info" toggle. Instead, a form-wide **Pseudonymization** setting (Settings tab → Privacy & Security) separates personally identifiable information from the rest of your results across the whole form. ## How respondents interact with Email Address fields Participants enter text into the answer field, like any other textbox based question. ## How to analyze the Report The Report (the Results tab, previously called the Quick Report) for this question type will simply list all results as ‘text responses’. --- # List of Question Types https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/list-of-question-types/ We have a wide selection of question types to be employed in the creation of your surveys, forms, and quizzes. These include Standard Questions, Contact Details, Special, Multi-Factor, Picture Choice, and Split Testing question types. To access them, from the Build tab: 1. Make sure you're on the **Form** tab in the left sidebar 2. Click **+ Question** next to any page (or click the **+** that appears beside any existing block) 3. You can also click into the empty "Click to add text or a question" area at the end of a page and type **/** to open the same picker The picker is organized into categories — Content Items, Standard Questions, Contact Details, Special, Multi-Factor, Picture Choices, and Split Testing — each with a short description of what it's for. Search at the top of the picker filters across all of them. To [insert a question](/build/surveys/how-to-add-and-edit-questions/), click the type you wish to use — it's added at the position you opened the picker from, and you can drag it (via the handle on the left) to re-order it afterwards. From here you're free to edit, delete, and re-arrange questions to your heart's content. You can even make cosmetic changes (text, images, and some settings) to your project [once it's been launched](/build/surveys/editing-live-projects/), but to add, remove, or re-order answer options you must delete all responses for the question. ## Standard Questions Below is a list of standard question types, which can be used to build your projects. Each type is tailored to gather respondent opinions and experiences in unique ways. ### [Opinion Scales](/build/questions/opinion-scales/) ![Opinion Scale Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/opinion-scale-2026.png)Provide your participants with a numbered scale, which can be accompanied by an optional heat bar to support their evaluation of the question, and better frame their answer. ### [Multi-Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-single-select/) ![Multiple-Choice (Single-Select) Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/multichoice-single-2026.png)Create a multiple-choice question, where participants can select a single answer. ### [Multi-Choice (Multi-Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-multi-select/) ![Multiple-Choice (Multi-Select) Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/multichoice-multi-2026.png) Collect more than one answer from respondents using a single, multiple-choice question. In the picker this is labelled "Multi-Choice (Multi Select)". ### [Star Rating](/build/questions/star-rating/) ![Star Rating Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-BwXNPRnngc.jpg)Ask participants to assign a star rating to a subject or statement. ### [Net Promoter Score®](/build/surveys/net-promoter-score-question/) ![NPS Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-G0x8n18RjL.jpg) Measure customer loyalty to your brand by asking a single question. The results from the NPS question type are compiled into a unique chart, which includes your calculated NPS and your number of Promoters (Green), Passives (Orange) and Detractors (Red). #### Net Promoter Score Chart ![NPS Chart](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-PY0IdBDz9I.jpg) ### [Drop Down List](/build/questions/drop-down-list/) ![Drop-Down List Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-GZbMAGfYQe.jpg) Allow your participators to select an answer from a drop-down menu. This is a similar format to the Multi-Choice (Single Select) question type, but may be more suitable for questions with a more substantial list of answers: e.g. country of origin. ### [Order Ranking](/build/questions/order-rankings/) ![Order Ranking Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/order-ranking-2026.png)Display a list of items that require the respondent to rank the options in ascending or descending order. ### [Slider](/build/questions/sliders/) ![Slider Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-YKaOJz8cWC.jpg)Like the Opinion Scale question type, participants can rate a subject or statement using a slider — in the picker this is labelled "Opinion Slider". A separate "Numeric Slider" type is also available for questions that need a plain numeric range rather than worded extremes. ### [Comments/ Essay Box](/build/questions/comments-essay-boxes/) ![Comment Box Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-yg6RxiMfka.jpg)A basic text entry box, allowing for a large amount of text to be entered. Labelled "Comments / Essay box" in the picker. ### [Text Box (Single)](/build/questions/text-box-single/) ![Text Box (Single) Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-vnSAHbplBX.jpg)A smaller text box, with room for a few words or a short sentence. ### [Text Box (Multiple)](/build/questions/text-box-multiple/) ![Text Box (Mutiple) Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-PMZ79TqEMv.jpg)A customizable number of text boxes, which all relate to one question. You are able to set headings/ prompts to each box, allowing you to tackle several smaller topics concerning one subject. Labelled "Text Boxes (multiple)" in the picker. ### [Date](/build/questions/date/) ![Date Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-hdfI2bLCwD.jpg)Respondents can select a single date from a calendar. ### [Date Range](/build/questions/date-range/) ![Date Range Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-vFIYlu9hj1.jpg)Respondents can select a date range. The Standard Questions category also includes a few newer types not covered in their own articles yet: **Binary Yes/No** (a two-option Yes/No question), **Number / Money** (a numeric or currency input), **Numeric Slider** (a slider over a plain numeric range), and **Payment** (collects a card payment as part of the form). ## Contact Details These question types write directly to the respondent's contact record in your [contact list](/contacts/), rather than being stored only as a survey answer. They cover the fields that used to be handled by marking any question as PII: **Full Name**, **Email address**, **Telephone number**, **Address Lookup**, and **Compact Contact Form** (a bundled name/email/phone block), plus a couple more available behind "Show 1 more…" in the picker. Whether a form saves contacts at all — and to which contact group — is controlled separately, under **Settings → Contact Saving**. ## Special A newer category covering advanced or compliance-related needs: **Net Promoter Score®**, **Consent** (for GDPR-style consent capture), **eSignature**, **External Datasource** (hidden questions populated from elsewhere, e.g. a URL parameter), **Restart Form Button**, and **File Upload**. ## Multi-Factor These question types are perfect for more complicated projects, where a more in-depth or multi-factored response is required from participants. Under the hood, Multi-Factor Scale and Multi-Factor Opinion Slider are the same widgets as Opinion Scale and Opinion Slider respectively, just started with a second scale/slider already added — see the individual articles for details. ### [Matrix (Common Scale)](/build/questions/matrix-common-scale/) ![Matrix Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/matrix-2026.png) Also known as a Table Grid or Rating Grid, this allows for multiple questions (rows) to be rated or evaluated under a single set of column headings. By default it starts with five columns (e.g. 'Strongly Disagree' through 'Strongly Agree') and two unlabelled rows for your own sub-questions. ### [Multi-Factor Scale](/build/questions/multi-factor-scales/) ![Multi-Factor Scale Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/multifactor-scale-2026.png)You may have also seen this referred to as a Likert Scale. These provide you with a means of requiring ONE question to be evaluated under numerous scales. ### [Multi-Factor Slider](/build/questions/multi-factor-sliders/) ![Multi-Factor Slider Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/multifactor-slider-2026.png)Supply a statement or question that can be rated by one or more scales, in the form of sliders. In the picker this is labelled "Multi-Factor Opinion Slider". ## Picture Choices The addition of pictures to a survey or quiz doesn't only improve its visual design, but can also grant further clarity and understanding to questions. ### [Picture Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/picture-choice-single-select/) ![Picture Choice (Single-Select) Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-mQ31y4C9Uy.jpg)This question type acts as a Multi-Choice (Single Select) question, but with an additional ability to attach images to the answer options. ### [Picture Choice (Multi-Select)](/build/questions/picture-choice-multi-select/) ![Picture Choice (Multiple Select) Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-Y2mf7AQ3JT.jpg)Like the Multi-Choice (Multi-Select) question type, more than one answer can be selected. However, this alternative gives you the ability to attach images to your answers. Note: the current question picker lists a single **Picture Choice** entry rather than separate Single/Multi options — single- vs. multi-select is likely now a setting on that one widget rather than two catalog entries. We haven't fully verified the settings on this specific type in this pass, so the single/multi articles above may need a follow-up review. ### [Picture Comments](/build/questions/picture-comments/) ![Picture Comments Question](/help-images/list-of-question-types/file-uj7FwqJl2K.jpg) Provide a set of images to be evaluated or analyzed by respondents. These images are accompanied by corresponding textboxes. ## Split Testing A newer category for A/B testing different versions of a question: **AB Text**, **AB Image**, and **AB Video** let you show respondents one of several variants and compare how each performs. * * * That rounds up the basics of each of our available question types. If you require further information, you can visit the individual articles for each. We're constantly looking for ways to improve your projects, so don't hesitate to get in touch via our chatbox. --- # Matrix (Common Scale) https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/matrix-common-scale/ ## What is a Matrix (Common Scale)? Matrix questions (also called Likert Scales), allow you to ask multiple sub-questions to be rated along a common scale. ![Matrix Question](/help-images/matrix-common-scale/matrix-2026.png) ## Why use a Matrix (Common Scale)? Matrices are handy for breaking down a question or statement into several sub-questions. Here's an example: ![Matrix Question Example](/help-images/matrix-common-scale/file-tkLW2HztVh.jpg) They're also more interactive and visually pleasing than other question types may be, stemming any possible or mental-taxation. ## How do I create a Matrix (Common Scale)? ![](/help-images/matrix-common-scale/file-8Rfir4cVtC.png) 1. Open the Build tab, and make sure you're on the **Form** tab in the sidebar 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Select **Matrix (common scale)** from the Multi-Factor category 4. Enter your question text 5. Click the column headings above the scales to open the Matrix dialog, where you can edit rows, columns, and headings ## How to Add an N/A answer Adding an N/A answer option to a Matrix allows a respondent to essentially opt out of giving a rating. This is useful if they haven't had an experience with you or don't have an opinion concerning a sub-question. ![Add A N/A Answer To A Matrix Question](/help-images/matrix-common-scale/matrix-na-dialog-2026.png) 1. Click the column headings above the Matrix to open its dialog 2. Click the **N/A** toggle next to the final column The N/A option will only appear next to the final answer in the scale. So, be sure to add another answer as you don't want to make an important scale point N/A. Results for your N/A option will be stored in your report, but they are not weighted in the total, ensuring your results are not skewed. The dialog spells this out directly: "This 'Not Applicable' column will be stored but not calculated into weighted average in results." ## Default Settings Once you've inserted this question type into your project, you'll be presented with five columns — 'Strongly Disagree', 'Disagree', 'Neutral', 'Agree', and 'Strongly Agree' — and two unlabelled rows for your own sub-questions, accompanied by a Rating Heat Bar. You can choose from a pre-set list of column headings via the "Choose from pre-made column headings" dropdown at the top of the Matrix dialog, or customize any row or column by editing its text directly. The dialog also has a "Change this a single row Matrix (remove row multiple choices)" option if you only need one row, plus buttons to add more rows, more columns, or an "Other / Text" free-text column. ## Question Settings Inside the settings panel (click **Show more settings** under the question) for Matrix (Common Scale) you have access to: - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Rating Heat Bar**: This allows you to toggle the visibility of the Rating Heat Bar. This is for visual purposes only, and cannot be interacted with by respondents. - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. There's no separate "Personal info" toggle for this question type — if you need answers tied to a respondent's contact record, use one of the dedicated [Contact Details question types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/) alongside your Matrix instead. ## How respondents interact with Matrix (Common Scale)? Respondents will be able to click any answer option along the rows, in correspondence with the column headings. The option they choose will represent their rating concerning your question or topic. If they change their mind, they can simply select another option along the row. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? The [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/) will represent your results in much the same way the question is formatted. The rows of the table represent each individual topic, whilst the columns highlight the column headings from your scale. You will also find sections for standard deviation, responses, and weighted average. By default, your results use a diverging stacked bar chart, with a 100% stacked mode available. Change this through the question item's chart menu; recommended types are marked. *Note: this reporting section was not re-verified in this pass — if the chart options above look off, let us know.* For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Multi-Factor Scales https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/multi-factor-scales/ ## What is a Multi-Factor Scale? ![Multi-Factor Scale Question](/help-images/multi-factor-scales/multifactor-scale-2026.png) Multi-Factor Scales give your respondents the means of evaluating one question or statement against multiple scales. Under the hood, this isn't a separate widget from [Opinion Scales](/build/questions/opinion-scales/) — it's the same Opinion Scale question with a second scale already added. Picking "Multi-Factor Scale" from the question picker is just a shortcut that starts you off with two scales instead of one; you'll still see it labelled "Opinion Scale" once it's on the canvas. ## Why use a Multi-Factor Scale? These question types prevent your survey from becoming too crowded with individual Opinion Scales when they could be consolidated into one space. They are also useful for gathering multiple assessments or perspectives on a singular question or topic. ## How do I create a Multi-Factor Scale? ![](/help-images/multi-factor-scales/file-o7TKpt0mGz.png) 1. Open the Build tab, and make sure you're on the **Form** tab in the sidebar 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Select **Multi-Factor Scale** from the Multi-Factor category 4. Enter your question text 5. Click the text labels at either end of each scale to assign your own extreme titles ### Add More Scales 1. Under the question, click **Add another scale** You can also turn a regular single Opinion Scale question into a multi-factor one the same way — "Add another scale" is available on every Opinion Scale question, not just ones created via the Multi-Factor Scale shortcut. ## Default Settings Two scales will be present by default once you've inserted a Multi-Factor Scale: one scaled from 'Extremely Poor' to 'Extremely Good', and the other from 'Hard' to 'Easy'. These are easily changeable by clicking the text and inserting your own extreme titles. A Rating Heat Bar is included by default, but you can toggle it off in the settings panel. Settings like Required, Numbered, and the range apply to the whole question — all of its scales share the same range and options. ## Question Settings Click **Show more settings** under the question for the full set of options: - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Rating Heat Bar**: This allows you to toggle the visibility of the Rating Heat Bar. This is for visual purposes only, and cannot be interacted with by respondents. - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. - **Selection type**: Use this drop-down to switch between the scale and slider format — switching it to Slider turns this into a [Multi-Factor Opinion Slider](/build/questions/multi-factor-sliders/) instead. - **Range start / Range end**: Set the start and end range numbers for your scale. There's no separate "Personal info" toggle for this question type — if you need answers tied to a respondent's contact record, use one of the dedicated [Contact Details question types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/) instead. ## How respondents interact with Multi-Factor Scales Participants will be able to click a point in the scales in order to select it. To change this selection, they merely need to choose another answer option, and it will be adjusted accordingly. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? On the left of your [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/), you'll find the titles of your extremes that correspond with the scales you provided. In the center will be your range of answer options, and then to the right, you'll see statistics concerning standard deviation, number of responses, and weighted averages. By default, your results use a diverging stacked bar chart, with both scale poles named. Use the question item's chart menu to choose another available type. *Note: this reporting section was not re-verified in this pass.* For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Multi-Factor Sliders https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/multi-factor-sliders/ ## What is a Multi-Factor Slider? ![Multi-Factor Slider Question](/help-images/multi-factor-sliders/multifactor-slider-2026.png)Much like the Multi-Factor Scale, this question type allows your respondents to evaluate a single question or statement through multiple sliders. In the question picker it's labelled "Multi-Factor Opinion Slider". Under the hood, this is the same "Slider" widget used by the single [Slider](/build/questions/sliders/) question type, just with a second slider already added and its Selection type set to Slider rather than Scale — you'll see it labelled "Slider" once it's on the canvas. ## Why use a Multi-Factor Slider? Sliders are a powerful interactive tool that will keep your respondents engaged in your survey. They also allow you to collate multiple sub-evaluations of a single topic, by breaking down complex questions into several categories. ## How do I create a Multi-Factor Slider? ![](/help-images/multi-factor-sliders/file-S7H7UgFy09.png) 1. Open the Build tab, and make sure you're on the **Form** tab in the sidebar 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Select **Multi-Factor Opinion Slider** from the Multi-Factor category 4. Enter your question text 5. Click the text labels at either end of each slider to assign the extreme titles ### Add Another Slider 1. Under the question, click **Add another scale** This link is available on every Slider question, so you can turn a single Opinion Slider into a multi-factor one at any time — not just when starting from the Multi-Factor Opinion Slider shortcut. ## Default Settings There will be two sliders present once you've inserted a Multi-Factor Slider into your project: one scaled from 'Extremely Poor' to 'Extremely Good', and the other from 'Hard' to 'Easy'. These are easily changeable by clicking the text and inserting your own titles. Settings like Required, Numbered, Selection type, and the range apply to the whole question — all of its sliders share the same range. There's no Rating Heat Bar option for sliders. ## Question Settings Click **Show more settings** under the question for the full set of options: - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. - **Selection type**: Use this drop-down to switch between the scale and slider format — switching it to Scale turns this into a [Multi-Factor Scale](/build/questions/multi-factor-scales/) instead. - **Range start / Range end**: Set the start and end range numbers for your sliders. There's no separate "Personal info" toggle for this question type — if you need answers tied to a respondent's contact record, use one of the dedicated [Contact Details question types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/) instead. ## How respondents interact with Multi-Factor Sliders Participants will be able to drag the slider along the bar, or simply click the position they want the bar to be set in. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? On the left of your [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/), you'll find the titles of your extremes that correspond with the scales you provided in your slider. In the center will be your range of answer options, and then to the right, you'll see statistics concerning standard deviation, number of responses, and weighted averages. By default, your results use a diverging stacked bar chart, with both scale poles named. Use the question item's chart menu to choose another available type. *Note: this reporting section was not re-verified in this pass.* For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Multichoice (Multi-Select) https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/multichoice-multi-select/ ## What are Multiple-Choice (Multi-Select) questions? ![Multiple-Choice Multi-Select Question](/help-images/multichoice-multi-select/multichoice-multi-2026.png) This question type is formatted in the same way as the [Multi-Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-single-select/) with one major difference: respondents can select more than one answer. The amount of answers that can be chosen, and the amount that are correct (in quizzes), is completely customizable by you. In the question picker, it's labelled "Multi-Choice (Multi Select)". You can add as many answer options as you want — type into the last (empty) answer box and press Tab/Enter to add another, or paste in a whole list of options at once: ![Add Answers to Multiple-Choice Multi-Select](/help-images/multichoice-multi-select/file-4luP2vMScI.jpg) You can also allow respondents to write a custom answer, with the "Other" text choice toggle: ![Other Answer Option or Multiple-Choice Multi-Select](/help-images/multichoice-multi-select/file-s1hwWnjQfS.jpg) ## Why use Multi-Choice (Multi-Select) questions? Like the Multi-Choice (Single Select), these are among the most used questions types in surveys and quizzes. **In Surveys**: Multi-Choice (Multi-Select) questions provide a way for respondents to select from a list of answers. **In Quizzes**: These question types allow participants to choose multiple answers to a question that may have more than one correct response. You can also set polls to multi-select by ticking the 'Allow multiple selections' box in the Poll Builder. Below this, you will be able to customise how many can be selected by inputting a number of your choice into the 'Maximum number of items that can be selected?' box. ## How do I create a Multi-Choice (Multi-Select) question? ![](/help-images/multichoice-multi-select/file-pMTYPgyLmc.png) 1. Open the Build tab, and make sure you're on the **Form** tab in the sidebar 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Select **Multi-Choice (Multi Select)** from the Standard Questions category 4. Enter your question text 5. Enter your answers in the answer boxes - Type into the last box and press Tab/Enter (or paste a list) to add more answer boxes - Turn on **"Other" text choice** in the settings panel to add an "Other" answer option ## Default Settings The default design of this question type places two answer boxes below the question field, in columns of three (adjustable via the **# of columns** setting). The minimum and maximum number of answers a respondent can select is unset by default — respondents can select as many of the answers as they like. ## Tips - Although leaving the maximum unset is acceptable for surveys, it is not recommended for quizzes. ## Question Settings Here are all the available settings for Multiple-Choice (Multi-Select) questions (click **Show more settings** under the question to see them all): - **Required**: Enable this feature to require respondents to answer this question before they can move to the next page or submit their response. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for this question. - **Option labels**: Choose whether answers are labelled A, B, C… or with numbers. - **Link to Contact detail**: Ties this question's answer to a field on the respondent's contact record (use **Manage contact fields** to set up which fields are available). This replaces the old "Personal info" toggle. - **"Other" text choice**: Allow respondents to write a free form answer for your question. - **Randomize**: Randomize the order of your answer options for this question. - **\# of columns**: Set the number of columns that answer choices should be displayed in. - **Minimum & Maximum**: Choose the minimum and maximum number of answers respondents need to select. **Quizzes only**: instead of a separate marking scheme, each answer option gets its own **Points** field — set points on whichever answer(s) are correct. You can also set optional **Correct answer message** / **Incorrect answer message** text under "Feedback Messages", shown to the respondent after they answer. ## Answer Settings Type into an answer box to reveal a small row of icons beneath it: a branch icon for **Question Logic**, an icon to **Insert Dynamic Text** (pull in text from contact details, a previous answer, or external data), a camera icon to attach an **image**, and an **X** to delete the answer. **In quizzes**, a **Points** field also appears next to each answer, letting you assign the score for that option directly — there's no separate correct/incorrect switch, the points value is what determines scoring. ## How respondents interact with Multi-Choice (Multi-Select) questions Respondents can select the answer(s) they wish to choose by left-clicking them. This answer is highlighted to remind you which has been chosen. To de-select an answer, simply left-click the option again. If a participant attempts to select more answers than the permitted number of selections set by you, they will be informed by the Survey/Quiz before they can continue. ## How to analyse the Quick Report? Answer options will be displayed in their original order, from left to right, in the [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/) of your [Quick Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/). You will also be informed of the total number of responses to the question. By default, your results will appear as a Column Graph, with each answer being assigned a colour within the chart. The other available options for this question type are Line Graph, Doughnut Chart, Radar Chart, Pie Chart. *Note: this reporting section was not re-verified in this pass.* ### 'Other' Responses Any responses gathered through the 'Other' answer option will be recorded in the 'Other' section of the Data Table. If text was attached to any of those answers, each response will be recorded in the 'Text Responses' section under the graphs. For more detailed instructions on analysing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-quiz-results/) - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Multichoice (Single Select) https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/multichoice-single-select/ ## What are Multi-Choice (Single Select) questions? ![](/help-images/multichoice-single-select/multichoice-single-2026.png) This type of question allows project participants to select one answer from a list of choices. It is possible to add as many answers as you want — type into the last (empty) answer box and press Tab/Enter, or paste in a list of options: ![Add More Answer to Multiple Choice Single Select](/help-images/multichoice-single-select/file-mKBcMCKsAi.jpg) You can also provide an 'Other' answer option by turning on the **"Other" text choice** setting: ![](/help-images/multichoice-single-select/file-ud69yWmfUG.jpg) ![Other Answer Option Multiple-Choice (Single-Select)](/help-images/multichoice-single-select/file-dJuY7aJHQR.jpg) ## Why use Multi-Choice (Single Select) questions? You can use multiple-choice (single-select) question types in both surveys and quizzes. **In Surveys**: A set of answers, where respondents can choose one. **In Quizzes**: Points can be applied to all answers, but respondents can only choose one answer. ## How do I create a Multi-Choice (Single Select) question? ![](/help-images/multichoice-single-select/file-aBwPuXeVFW.png) 1. Open the Build tab, and make sure you're on the **Form** tab in the sidebar 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Select **Multi-Choice (Single Select)** from the Standard Questions category 4. Enter your question text 5. Enter your answers in the answer boxes - Type into the last box and press Tab/Enter (or paste a list) to add more answer boxes - Turn on **"Other" text choice** in the settings panel to add an "Other" answer option ## Default Settings There will be a minimum of two answer option boxes available, by default, when you insert this question type into your project. Your answer boxes will also be displayed in columns of three, but this is changeable via the **# of columns** setting under **Show more settings**. The maximum number of answers a respondent can select defaults to one. You can raise this in the **Multiple selections** settings, although you may want to use the [Multi-Choice (Multi-Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-multi-select/) question type if you intend to allow more than one answer. If you're creating a quiz, there's no separate marking scheme — each answer option gets its own **Points** field, and you set points on whichever answer is correct. ## Tips - You may want to avoid making Multi-Choice answer lists too long, as it could affect the readability of your project. In these cases, we would suggest using the [Drop Down List](/build/questions/drop-down-list/) question type as an alternative. - Although you can allow respondents to select more than one answer, we'd recommend using the Multi-Choice (Multi-Select) question type for this. ## Question Settings Click **Show more settings** under the question to see the full set of options: - **Required**: Enable this feature to require respondents to answer this question before they can move to the next page or submit their response. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for this question. - **Option labels**: Choose whether answers are labelled A, B, C… or with numbers. - **Link to Contact detail**: Ties this question's answer to a field on the respondent's contact record (use **Manage contact fields** to configure available fields). This replaces the old "Personal info" toggle. - **"Other" text choice**: Allow respondents to write a free form answer for your question. - **Randomize**: Randomize the order of your answer options for this question. - **\# of columns**: Set the number of columns that answer choices should be displayed in. - **Minimum & Maximum**: Choose the minimum and maximum number of answers respondents need to select. **Quizzes only**: an additional "Feedback Messages" section lets you set optional **Correct answer message** / **Incorrect answer message** text, shown to the respondent after they answer. ## Answer Settings Type into an answer box to reveal a small row of icons beneath it: a branch icon for **Question Logic**, an icon to **Insert Dynamic Text** (pull in text from contact details, a previous answer, or external data), a camera icon to attach an **image**, and an **X** to delete the answer. **In quizzes**, a **Points** field also appears next to each answer — for this question type we'd suggest assigning points to only one answer, since only one can be selected. ## How respondents interact with Multi-Choice (Single Select) questions Participants will see this question identically to how you customized it. They select their answer by clicking on their chosen option, which is then highlighted for future reference. It is possible for respondents to change their answer, which can be done by clicking another answer box. If you chose to insert an 'Other' option, a text box will appear below it once clicked. This text box can be used to provide further information and answers, or it can be left blank for the answer to be recorded as 'Other'. ## How to analyze the Quick Report Once your project has been launched, you will have live access to your results. Here you will find quick reports for each question. Answer options will be displayed in their original order, from left to right, in the [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/) of your [Quick Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/). You will also be informed of the total number of responses to the question. By default, your results will appear as a Column Graph, with each answer being assigned a color within the chart. The other available options for this question type are Line Graph, Doughnut Chart, Radar Chart, Pie Chart. *Note: this reporting section was not re-verified in this pass.* ## 'Other' Responses Any responses gathered through the 'Other' answer option will be recorded in the 'Other' section of the Data Table. If text was attached to any of those answers, each response will be recorded in the 'Text Responses' section under the graphs. For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-quiz-results/) - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Opinion Scales https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/opinion-scales/ ## What is an Opinion Scale? ![Opinion Scale Question Type](/help-images/opinion-scales/opinion-scale-2026.png) These question types provide your project respondents with a numbered scale, by which the statement or question it concerns can be rated. You can also customize the names of the extremes at either end of the scale, and choose whether the scale should be accompanied by a Rating Heat Bar (color bar). You may also see Opinion Scales referred to as Likert scales, these simply refer to reliable ways of measuring attitudes or behaviors against a linear scale. This is the same underlying question widget as the [Slider](/build/questions/sliders/) question type — a **Selection type** setting lets you flip between "Scale" (this article) and "Slider" without recreating the question; the only real difference is how respondents interact with it. ### Why use an Opinion Scale? Opinions Scales provide respondents with a fresh and logical way of evaluating a question or statement, within the context of a scale you set. It's also useful for when you've already used a Slider in your project, but wish to use another scaled question type. This way your format does not become stale. ## How do I create an Opinion Scale? ![](/help-images/opinion-scales/file-yhei2qhHtW.png) 1. Open the Build tab, and make sure you're on the **Form** tab in the sidebar 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Select **Opinion Scale** from the Standard Questions category 4. Enter your question text ## Default Settings The default settings for this question type scale the answer options from 0-10 and are accompanied by a Rating Heat Bar, but this can be changed in the question's settings panel. From there, you can also change your Scale into a Slider via **Selection type**. The scale extremes are set as 'Extremely Poor' (lesser extreme) and 'Extremely Good' (greater extreme) by default, but these can easily be edited by clicking on them. Every Opinion Scale question also has an **Add another scale** link underneath it — clicking this adds a second (or third, etc.) scale to the same question, at which point it behaves like a [Multi-Factor Scale](/build/questions/multi-factor-scales/). ## Tips - The scale options should be consistent and logical - The scale options should be inclusive: if you're rating an experience, the scale options should span from 'very good' to 'very bad', not 'very good' to 'average' - The question/ statement should only need a simple response - Include as many scale points as you think necessary, but too many will affect the readability of your survey - It's not mandatory to name either end of the scale, but it may improve the clarity of the question/ statement ## Question Settings Click **Show more settings** under the question to see the full set of options: - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Rating Heat Bar**: This allows you to toggle the visibility of the Rating Heat Bar. This is for visual purposes only, and cannot be interacted with by respondents. - **Selection type**: Switches the question between Scale and Slider format. - **Range start / Range end**: Set the start and end numbers for your scale. - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. There's no separate "Personal info" toggle for this question type — if you need answers tied to a respondent's contact record, use one of the dedicated [Contact Details question types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/) instead. ## How respondents interact with the Opinion Scale The scale looks almost identical, to the respondent, as it looks whilst you are creating your project. The only difference lies in their ability to select a number in correspondence to your question or statement. However, if you wish to preview your finished questions and format before finalizing the launch, click the Preview icon in the top toolbar. The participants' choice is not final until they click the Finish Survey button. ## How to Analyze the Quick Report? Answer options will be displayed in their original order, from left to right, in the [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/) of your [Quick Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/). You will also receive stats on the standard deviation, total number of responses, and a weighted average for that question. By default, your results will appear as a Column Graph, with each answer being assigned a colour within the chart. The other available options for this question type are Line Graph, Doughnut Chart, Radar Chart, Pie Chart. *Note: this reporting section was not re-verified in this pass.* For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Order Rankings https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/order-rankings/ ## What are Order Ranking questions? ![Order Ranking Question](/help-images/order-rankings/order-ranking-2026.png)This is the perfect question type if you need your respondents to rank numerous answer options in comparison to each other, or by preference. These rankings can be formatted in ascending or descending order, depending on the context of your question or statement. ## Why use Order Ranking question types? Using an Order Ranking question gives value to each answer option, and provides a clear comparison of that value in contrast to the other ranked options. They may also stimulate respondents to be more evaluative when filling out your survey. ## How do I create Order Ranking questions? ![](/help-images/order-rankings/file-cNL9LvurUv.png) 1. Open the Build tab, and make sure you're on the **Form** tab in the sidebar 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Select **Order Ranking** from the Standard Questions category 4. Enter your question text 5. Add your answer options ## Default Settings By default, two answer options will be immediately available to you when the Order Ranking question type is inserted. To insert more answer options, click **Add option** underneath the last one. Answer randomization will automatically be turned off, but you can change this in the question's settings panel. ## Tips - Keep your answer options to a minimal amount, as ranking too many options can become mentally taxing to respondents. - Make sure each of your answer options are distinct to any other, as respondents should be able to differentiate between the meaning of each, to rank them efficiently. - Try to provide a complete and inclusive variety of answer options for each question, so every respondent feels an option applies to them more than any other. - Define whether your ranking should be done in ascending or descending order in the question box — there's no separate setting for this, it's purely down to how you phrase the question. - If you're using more than one Order Ranking in your project, be consistent in whether your ranking in ascending or descending order. Without this consistency, participants are more likely to misunderstand or make a mistake in their response. - Try not to include too many Order Ranking questions, as they can take a long time to consider and respond to. ## Question Settings Click **Show more settings** under the question for the full set of options: - **Required**: Enable this feature to require respondents to answer this question before they can move to the next page or submit their response. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for this question. - **Randomize**: Randomize the order of your answer options for this question. There's no separate "Personal info" toggle for this question type — if you need answers tied to a respondent's contact record, use one of the dedicated [Contact Details question types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/) alongside your ranking question instead. ## How respondents interact with Order Rankings? Respondents will be able to drag and drop the answer options to any place above or below the others. Where these options are placed relies upon the rules you've defined in the question box, i.e. whether the options should be ordered in an ascending or descending fashion. They will also have the option of skipping this question type, by clicking "skip question?". Once participants are happy with their rankings, they can click "finished sorting?" below the answer options to finalize their choices. However, clicking this will not disable them from changing the order further. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? Your results will need to be analyzed in comparison to the rules you set for ascending or descending ranking in your question, i.e. if you asked your respondents to order answers from best (lowest number) to worst (highest number), then your highest ranked answer will have the lowest weighted average. *Note: this reporting section was not re-verified in this pass.* For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Picture Choice (Multi-Select) https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/picture-choice-multi-select/ ## What is a Picture Choice (Multi-Select) question? ![Picture Choice (Multi-Select) Question](/help-images/picture-choice-multi-select/file-Y2mf7AQ3JT.jpg)This question type allows your respondents to select multiple answers options, from a selection of images. You can also assign captions to individual images. To reduce the amount of clipping that occurs when uploading an image for this question type, we suggest an image ratio of roughly 131 : 95. ## Why use a Picture Choice (Multi-Select) question type? Question types such as these are more visually interactive, and keep your projects from becoming stale. ## How do I create a Picture Choice (Multi-Select) question? ![](/help-images/picture-choice-multi-select/file-8AypDJyQdE.png) 1. Go to the Builder 2. Open the Form tab 3. Click 'New question' 4. Select Picture Choice (Multi-Select) 5. Insert images 6. (Optional) Insert image captions ### Add Another Image Box ![Add Answers to Picture Choice (Multi-Select)](/help-images/picture-choice-multi-select/file-XqxHtrZ9l9.jpg) 1. Click the Picture Choice (Multi-Select) Question 2. Select 'Add answer' ## How do I insert images? 1. Click the image slot 2. Select an image from your [library](/build/text-images-and-video/about-the-image-library/) Or Press ‘Click to upload’ 3. Choose an image from your files and press ‘Open’ ## Default Settings Four image boxes will appear once this question type is inserted, and can be removed by clicking the answer option and then the ‘X’ button. Conversely, you can insert more image boxes by pressing ‘Add Answer’. ## Question Settings Bar ## Inside the [Question Settings Bar](https://secure.helpscout.net/docs/5b716f622c7d3a03f89d9f0b/article/5b7188212c7d3a03f89da031/163-question-quick-menu) for Picture Choice (Multi-Select) you have several options: - Personal info: When enabled, the data from any question marked as PII in the ‘question settings’ will be stored as a separate response. Allowing you to identify who has completed your survey, and at what time, without viewing the other answers they’ve given. - Required: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. - Numbered: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - Randomize answer order: toggle the ability to randomly change the answer order for respondents. - Min/ Max answers: Select the minimum and the maximum number of answers that respondents will be able to select. Changing this from one to any other number will essentially change your question type from [Picture Choice (Single Select)](https://secure.helpscout.net/docs/5b716f622c7d3a03f89d9f0b/article/5b7188212c7d3a03f89da031/53-picture-choice-single-select) to [Picture Choice (Multi-Select)](https://secure.helpscout.net/docs/5b716f622c7d3a03f89d9f0b/article/5b7188212c7d3a03f89da031/52-picture-choice-multi-select). - "Other" text choice: Allow respondents to write a free form answer to your question. ## How respondents interact with Picture Choice (Multi-Select) questions Image answers are selected simply by clicking the relevant image option, where their choices will be highlighted by ticks. They can also enlarge the attached images by hovering over the answer option and clicking the camera icon. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? All your data will be represented across one row in the [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/), where the columns provide data on individual answer options. You will also receive statistics on standard deviation and the number of responses. The default settings for this question type will illustrate your collected data as a Doughnut Chart, but these formats are interchangeable via the Question Quick Menu. The other graph types available to this question type are Line Graph, Column Graph, Radar Chart, and Pie Chart. For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Picture Choice (Single-Select) https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/picture-choice-single-select/ ## What are Picture Choice (Single Select) questions? ![Picture Choice (Single Select) Question](/help-images/picture-choice-single-select/file-mQ31y4C9Uy.jpg)These are multiple-choice questions, where respondents can only select one answer. This question type was created for those questions where the answer options could be more visual, i.e. images instead of text. However, you are able to caption each image. To reduce the amount of clipping that occurs when uploading an image for this question type, we suggest an image ratio of roughly 131 : 95. ## Why use Picture Choice (Single Select) questions? This question type allows you to make your survey more visually pleasing, by reducing the amount of text on the page. ## How do I create a Picture Choice (Single Select) question? ![](/help-images/picture-choice-single-select/file-bsgUbeSNco.png) 1. Go to the Builder 2. Open the Form tab 3. Click 'New question' 4. Select Picture Choice (Single Select) 5. Insert images 6. (Optional) Insert image captions ### Add Answers to Picture Choice Single Select ![Add Answers to Picture Choice (Single Select)](/help-images/picture-choice-single-select/file-7qRqmQhDyS.jpg) 1. Click the Picture Choice question 2. Select 'Add answer' ## How do I insert images? 1. Click the image slot 2. Select an image from your [library](/build/text-images-and-video/about-the-image-library/) OR Press ‘Click to upload’ 3. Choose an image from your files and press ‘Open’ ## Default Settings Four image boxes will appear once this question type is inserted, and can be removed by opening the answer settings and then the ‘X’ button. Alternatively, you can insert more image boxes by clicking ‘Add Answer’. ## Question Settings Bar Inside the [Question Settings Bar](/build/surveys/question-quick-menu/) for Picture Choice (Single Select) you have several options: - **Personal info**: When enabled, the data from any question marked as PII in the ‘question settings’ will be stored as a separate response. Allowing you to identify who has completed your survey, and at what time, without viewing the other answers they’ve given. - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Randomize answer order**: toggle the ability to randomly change the answer order for respondents. - **Min/ Max answers**: Select the minimum and the maximum number of answers that respondents will be able to select. Changing this from one to any other number will essentially change your question type from [Picture Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/picture-choice-single-select/) to [Picture Choice (Multi-Select)](/build/questions/picture-choice-multi-select/). - **"Other" text choice**: Allow respondents to write a free form answer to your question. ## How respondents interact with Picture Choice (Single Select) questions Image answers are selected simply by clicking the relevant image option, where the choice will be highlighted by a tick. They can also enlarge the attached images by hovering over the answer option and clicking the camera icon. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? All your data will be represented across one row in the [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/), where the columns provide data on individual answer options. You will also be able to view your total number of responses. The default settings for this question type will illustrate your collected data as a Column Graph, but these formats are interchangeable via the Question Quick Menu. There you will be able to choose between the additional Doughnut Chart, Line Graph, Column Graph, Radar Chart, or Pie Chart. For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-quiz-results/) - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Picture Comments https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/picture-comments/ ## What are Picture Comment questions? ![Picture Comment Question](/help-images/picture-comments/file-uj7FwqJl2K.jpg)Like other picture choice question types, you can upload a set of images to be evaluated by respondents. However, Picture Comments provide corresponding textboxes for participants to insert their own answers into. To reduce the amount of clipping that occurs when uploading an image for this question type, we suggest an image ratio of roughly 131 : 95. ## Why use Picture Comments? These question types offer respondents an opportunity to critically analyze or evaluate an array of provided images. You will also receive a large data set of unique perspectives on the images regarding your set question. ## How do I create a Picture Comment question? ![](/help-images/picture-comments/file-12SOhsYulW.png) 1. Go to Builder 2. Open the Form tab 3. Click 'New question' 4. Select 'Picture Comments' 5. Insert images 6. (Optional) Insert text box captions ### Add Another Picture Comment Box ![Add Another Picture Comments Box](/help-images/picture-comments/file-RNP3kpQLIK.jpg) 1. Click the Picture Comments question 2. Select 'Add another text box' ## How do I insert images? 1. Click the image slot 2. Select an image from your [library](/build/text-images-and-video/about-the-image-library/) Or Press ‘Click to upload’ 3. Choose an image from your files and press ‘Open’ ## Default Settings Four image boxes will appear once this question type is inserted, and can be removed by clicking the answer option and then the ‘X’ button. Conversely, you can insert more image boxes by pressed ‘Add another text box'. ## Question Settings Bar Inside the [Question Settings Bar](/build/surveys/question-quick-menu/) for Picture Comments you have two options: - **Personal info**: When enabled, the data from any question marked as PII in the ‘question settings’ will be stored as a separate response. Allowing you to identify who has completed your survey, and at what time, without viewing the other answers they’ve given. - **Numbered**: Disable (or enable) numbering for this single question. ## How respondents interact with Picture Comment questions In this question type, respondents do not interact with the images other than to enlarge them. Instead, they are required to fill out the text boxes below each image. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? All data collected by Picture Comments will be listed under ‘Text Responses’ for the corresponding question in the [Quick Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/). For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-quiz-results/) - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Sliders https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/sliders/ ## What are Sliders? ![](/help-images/sliders/file-YKaOJz8cWC.jpg)Your participants will be provided with a numbered scale, through which they can rate or evaluate your question or statement. You will be able to customize the numbers in the scale, along with the names of the extremes. You may also see Sliders referred to as Likert scales, these simply refer to reliable ways of measuring attitudes or behaviors against a linear scale. ## Why use a Slider? Sliders are great for introducing another level of interactivity for your respondents. They can also be used as an alternative to the [Opinion Scale](/build/questions/opinion-scales/) question type. ## How do I create a Slider question type? ![](/help-images/sliders/file-dVER87Aso0.png) 1. Open the Form tab 2. Click '+ Question' 3. Under 'Standard Questions', select **Opinion Slider** (the card on the question itself is still labelled "Slider") 4. Enter your question above the slider 5. Assign labels to the extreme ends of the scale There's also a separate **Numeric Slider** type in the same 'Standard Questions' list, for when you want a plain numeric value (e.g. quantity, age) rather than an opinion scale with worded extremes — it doesn't carry the "Extremely Poor/Extremely Good" style labels. You can add more sliders to the same question and customize the scales for each. ![Add Multiple Scales](/help-images/sliders/file-HKEUDMcHZP.jpg) 1. Click the question 2. Click 'Add another scale' ## Default Settings When inserted into your project, the Slider will be scaled from 0-10 by default. These can be changed in the Question Quick Menu. The scale extremes will also have the pre-assigned names ‘Extremely Poor' and 'Extremely Good'. You can edit these by clicking the words at either end of the scale. ## Tips - The scale options must be interpretable through the question/ statement. - The scale options should be consistent and logical. - The scale options should span from ‘very good’ to ‘very bad’, not ‘very good’ to ‘average. - The question/ statement should only need a simple response. ## Question Quick Menu Inside the Question Settings Bar for Sliders you have several options: - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Selection type**: Use this drop-down to switch between the scale and slider format. - **Range start - range end\***: Set the start and end range numbers for your scale or slider. ## How respondents interact with Sliders? The slider will look identical to the respondent as it will to you whilst creating your survey. However, participants will be able to adjust the slider between the set end of the scale. The number you settle on will be displayed in the center box below the Slider. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? In the left-most column of the [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/), you’ll find the names of your extremes. The center of the table represents the range and response statistics. Results use a diverging stacked bar by default, naming both poles; use the item's chart menu to choose another available type. For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Star-Rating https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/star-rating/ ## What are Star Rating questions? ![Star Wars](/help-images/star-rating/file-BwXNPRnngc.jpg) Allow your respondents to give a rating using stars. This rating will be contrasted to the number of possible stars you assign to the question. You may be familiar with this question type, as movies and restaurants are rated in the same way. ## Why use them? Star ratings give your survey an element of style and interactivity that other question types may not incorporate. They may also provide a slight visual relief to participants if your project includes a large amount of reading and critical analysis. ## How do I create Star Rating questions? ![](/help-images/star-rating/file-L9XfZ4zMDj.png) 1. Open the Form tab 2. Click '+ Question' 3. Under 'Standard Questions', select Star Rating 4. Enter your question above the rating system 5. (optional) Assign a name or text to the individual star rating scale Default Settings The default settings for Star Rating will insert the question type with a single set (row) of stars, with an "(optional)" placeholder label you can replace. Click 'Add another star option' beneath the row to add further rows to the same question, each with its own label. The default number of stars in each row is set to 5, adjustable via the 'Number of stars' slider in the Question Settings Bar. ## Tips - Although Star Ratings may break up the monotony of constant textual answers for respondents, using too many of this question type may compromise this. It would be more beneficial to include a few statements or questions to be rated in this way, and then move on to using a new question type. - You may want to provide a number of stars that most participants are used to rating out of, i.e. out of 5, or out of 10. ## Question Quick Menu The Star Rating Question Settings Bar gives you access to the below options: - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Number of stars**: This slider can be dragged to control the maximum number of stars available in the question. ## How respondents interact with Star Rating questions? Participants can click the star they wish to select to respond to your question or statement. If they change their mind, they can simply click another star and their selection will be adjusted. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? The [Data Table](/results/your-quick-report/data-tables/) will list the possible star ratings that were available to participants from lowest (left) to highest (right). You will find the number of respondents who selected each star beneath these options, along with the percentage of the total number these portray. You will also be provided with the standard deviation, total number of responses, and the weighted average of your results. Below the Data Table, you will find a graphic representation of your results in the form of an average star rating. Through the Question Quick Menu you will also be able to format your results into a Line Graph, Column Graph, or Radar Chart. For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Text Box (Multiple) https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/text-box-multiple/ ## What are Text Box (Multiple) questions? ![Text Box (Multiple) Question](/help-images/text-box-multiple/file-PMZ79TqEMv.jpg) These question types allow you to collate more than one answer to a singular question. You’ll be able to customize a title for each answer box, so respondents know what to write in them. ## Why use Text Box (Multiple) questions? These are useful for splitting a question or topic into specific talking points for respondents, or equally for gathering certain types of personal information. ## How do I create a Text Box (Multiple) question? ![](/help-images/text-box-multiple/file-xraeX26x02.png) 1. Open the Form tab 2. Click '+ Question' 3. Under 'Standard Questions', select Text Boxes (multiple) 4. Enter your question ### Adding Another Text Field ![Add Another Text Field](/help-images/text-box-multiple/file-6u5e7lmq8R.jpg) 1. Click the Text Box Question 2. Click 'Add another text box' Another text field will be added to the question. ## Default Settings Two answer fields will be present once this question type is inserted into your project. You can input additional answer boxes by clicking ‘Add another text box’ which can be found beneath the existing answer boxes. To remove any boxes, access the settings menu for that box by clicking it and then the ‘X’ in the dropdown settings menu. ## Tips - Frame your questions so they can be answered in a sentence or less. - Most useful for obtaining small amounts of information. ## Question Settings Bar Inside the [Question Quick Menu](/build/surveys/question-quick-menu/) for Text Box (Multiple) you will find one option at the question level: - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. ### Answer Settings As this question has multiple answer boxes, you can apply settings to each individual text box available. To do this: 1. Click the answer field 2. Click the Cog icon on the right of the question box Here are the individual answer settings for the text fields: - **Required**: This option will appear as a box, which can be enabled or disabled. When enabled, it will force respondents to complete the question before they can finish the survey or quiz. When disabled, participants will be able to skip any question. By default, this setting will be inactive. - **Textarea height (rows)**: Customize the size of the textbox, and therefore the amount of text a respondent can input. - **Link to Contact detail**: Choose a contact field to link this text box's responses to. Use 'Manage contact fields' (the gear icon beside it) to add or edit the available contact fields. - **Input Limitation**: Control what type of information participants can input. Toggle between ‘None’ (no Input Limitation), ‘Numeric’ (only numbers can be input), ‘Email’ (only email addresses can be input), ‘Web Address’ (only URLs can be input), and ‘Telephone Number’ (only phone numbers can be input). ## How respondents interact with Text Boxes (Multiple)? All respondents can input a small amount of text into the supplied text boxes. Once finished, they can click another box to input more text, or press 'enter' to move down a box. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? You will find all answers for the Text Box (Multiple) under ‘Text Responses’ of the relevant question. All answers from one respondent will be in a self-contained box, as not to be confused with data from different respondents. The answers will be displayed in the order you set the corresponding questions. For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-quiz-results/) - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Text Box (Single) https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/text-box-single/ ## What are Text Box (Single) questions? ![Text Box Single Question](/help-images/text-box-single/file-vnSAHbplBX.jpg) Provide your participants with space for a short, open-ended response. You can even tailor your text box to accept certain types of textual input, e.g. text/ numbers/ email addresses/ web addresses, although we do have specific fields for this data under our [Contact Details](/build/questions/contact-details-element-types/) fields. ## Why use a Text Box (Single)? These boxes are particularly useful for collecting respondent information or details and are therefore often employed in contact forms. Although, they’re equally useful in collating short precise responses. ## How do I create a Text Box (Single) question? ![](/help-images/text-box-single/file-Epv7OCfM37.png) 1. Open the Form tab 2. Click '+ Question' 3. Under 'Standard Questions', select Text Box (single) 4. Enter your question ## Default Settings The number of rows in the text box will be set to one by default. This is changeable through the Question Quick Menu, but you could consider using the [Comment Box/ Essay Box](/build/questions/comments-essay-boxes/) question type for questions that require longer responses. There will be no input limitations set to your box when you insert this question type into your survey, but you can apply them through the ‘More’ section of the Question Settings Bar. ## Tips - Format the questions so they can be answered in a sentence or less. - These question types are most useful for obtaining small amounts of information. ## Question Quick Menu Inside the [Question Settings Bar](/build/surveys/question-quick-menu/) for Text Box (Single) you will find several options: - **Required**: This option will appear as a box, which can be enabled or disabled. When enabled, it will force respondents to complete the question before they can finish the survey or quiz. When disabled, participants will be able to skip any question. By default, this setting will be inactive. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Text rows**: Customize the size of the textbox, and therefore the amount of text a respondent can input. - **Prefix / Postfix**: Add fixed text immediately before or after the respondent's answer (e.g. a currency symbol or unit of measurement). - **Input Limitation**: Control what type of information participants can input. Toggle between ‘None’ (no Input Limitation), ‘Numeric’ (only numbers can be input), ‘Email’ (only email addresses can be input), ‘Web Address’ (only URLs can be input), and ‘Telephone Number’ (only phone numbers can be input). - **Link to Contact detail**: Choose a contact field to link all responses for this question to. Use 'Manage contact fields' (the gear icon beside it) to add or edit the available contact fields. ## How respondents interact with a Text Box (Single)? Participants can enter a short amount of text into the box by clicking it and typing. ## How to analyze the Quick Report? All replies for Text Boxes (Single) will be listed under ‘Text Responses’ for the relevant question in your [Quick Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/). The most recent answers will be situated at the top of the list. For more detailed instructions on analyzing your report, you can visit either of these articles: - [How to Analyze Quiz Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-quiz-results/) - [How to Analyze Survey Results](/results/analyzing-your-results/analyzing-survey-results/) --- # Web Address Element https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/web-address-element/ ## What is a Web Address field? ![](/help-images/web-address-element/file-MWD4AVmMJz.png)This type of text field is used to collect web address information from your respondents. There is no standalone "Web Address" item in the question picker — it's implemented as an **Input Limitation** applied to a [Text Box (single)](/build/questions/text-box-single/) or [Text Boxes (multiple)](/build/questions/text-box-multiple/) question, which restricts what respondents can type into that field to URLs. ## Why use a Web Address field? Asking for too many details from your respondents can be off-putting for them, but you can never have too much information. Collecting web addresses is another way of learning more about your respondents, which may well be the aim of your project. ## How to create a Web Address field? ![](/help-images/web-address-element/file-ytImEWZR0t.png) 1. Go to the Builder 2. Open the Form tab 3. Click '+ Question' 4. Under 'Standard Questions', select **Text Box (single)** (or **Text Boxes (multiple)** if you need more than one) 5. Title your field 6. Open 'Show more settings' on the question (for Text Boxes (multiple), click the field and then the cog icon instead) and set **Input Limitation** to **Web Address** ## Default Settings A freshly-added Text Box (single) question has no Input Limitation applied and a textarea height of one line. Setting the Input Limitation to 'Web Address' restricts respondent input to URLs; none of the other settings change. ## Question Settings Bar - **Required**: This option will appear as a box, which can be enabled or disabled. When enabled, it will force respondents to complete the question before they can finish the survey or quiz. When disabled, participants will be able to skip any question. By default, this setting will be inactive. - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Text rows**: Customize the size of the textbox, and therefore the amount of text a respondent can input. - **Prefix / Postfix**: Add fixed text immediately before or after the respondent's answer. - **Input Limitation**: Control what type of information participants can input. Toggle between ‘None’ (no Input Limitation), ‘Numeric’ (only numbers can be input), ‘Email’ (only email addresses can be input), ‘Web Address’ (only URLs can be input), and ‘Telephone Number’ (only phone numbers can be input). - **Link to Contact detail**: Choose a contact field to link all responses for this question to. Use 'Manage contact fields' (the gear icon beside it) to add or edit the available contact fields. ## How respondents interact with the Web Address field Participants will be able to enter text into the text field, like all other textbox based question. ## How to analyze the Quick Report The Quick Report for this question type will simply list all results as ‘text responses’. --- # Zip/ Postcode Lookup https://docs.shout.com/build/questions/zip-postcode-lookup-element/ ## What is Zip/ Postcode Lookup? ![](/help-images/zip-postcode-lookup-element/file-LRa0RIH9AS.png)This question type is now labelled **Address Lookup** in the question picker (it still appears in the builder outline as "Contact Details"). It acts as a way to add an address form to your project, and includes a quick address lookup feature which can be turned on or off from the question's own settings. ## Why use an Zip/ Postcode Lookup? If you’re a business, then geographic information can be used to tailor products or services based on location. Alternatively, you could use this information to construct customer profile templates to further understand your target audience. ## How to create an Zip/ Postcode Lookup? ![](/help-images/zip-postcode-lookup-element/file-2Am69314jt.png) 1. Go to the Builder 2. Open the Form tab 3. Click '+ Question' 4. Under **Contact Details**, select **Address Lookup** 5. Title your field by clicking the heading text (default is 'Contact Details') ## Default Settings The default heading for this question is now ‘Contact Details’ (this used to read ‘Address’), which you can edit by clicking directly on the heading text. Six fields are inserted along with this question type, by default. These include: - Zip/ Postal Code - Address - Address 2 - City/ Town - State/ Province - Country You’re free to change the label text of any field. Each field also carries its own **Link to contact detail** mapping (shown as a small pill to the right of the field, e.g. Zip/Postal Code → "Zip / Post Code", Address → "Address Line 1") so that answers prefill automatically when the respondent is already known, and update the contact record when the form is submitted. If a contact field is already linked elsewhere in the form, that option is greyed out in the dropdown to prevent duplicate links. You can also bundle extra fields into the same question via **Additional contact details** — a small field-picker under the question that lets you add First Name, Company, Email Address, Phone Number, or Last name to the block. There's no longer a way to individually toggle 'Required' on each field from this question's settings — the six default fields and any you add come as shown. ## Question Quick Menu Clicking the question in the Form tab expands its settings inline (this is the current equivalent of the older [Question Settings Bar](/build/surveys/question-quick-menu/) for this question type). For Address Lookup, you'll find: - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Additional contact details**: Pick from First Name, Company, Email Address, Phone Number, or Last name to add more fields to this question — see Default Settings above. - **Zip / postcode lookup** _(UK/US only)_: This toggle turns the address-lookup step on or off. When on, respondents search by Zip/Postal Code and the rest of the fields stay hidden until a match is picked. When off, every field (including Country, now a dropdown) is shown immediately for manual entry, with no search step at all. - **Save to contacts** / **Manage contact group**: Opens Settings → Contact Saving → Groups, the same group picker used to configure [Consent](/build/forms/how-to-use-the-consent-question-type/). Use it to control whether submitting this form saves a contact record, and which contact group it's added to. **Note**: The older 'Hidden Fields', 'Personal info' (PII), and 'Link to contact field' options described in previous versions of this article no longer apply to this question type. Contact Details questions like Address Lookup now write to the contact record directly and use the per-field 'Link to contact detail' pill described above, rather than a single PII flag — see [List of Question Types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/) for how this replaced the old PII marking. ## How respondents interact with Address Lookup forms By default, respondents are only shown a 'Zip / Postal Code' field with a search icon next to it. If you've left the Zip/postcode lookup toggle on, the rest of the fields (Address, Address 2, City/Town, State/Province, Country) stay hidden until the respondent enters their zip/postcode and clicks the search icon — a successful lookup auto-fills all the corresponding fields. Respondents can skip the lookup at any time by clicking the 'Manual entry' link, which reveals every field immediately for typing in by hand (Country appears as a dropdown rather than free text). If you've turned the Zip/postcode lookup toggle off in the builder, there's no lookup step or 'Manual entry' link at all — respondents just see every field straight away. ## How to Analyze the Results Address Lookup answers appear as a data table under the question's heading (e.g. "Contact Details") on the **Report** tab of your project's Results. See [About the Quick Report](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/) for more on reading response data tables. --- # Can I Set a Timer for a Quiz https://docs.shout.com/build/quizzes/can-i-set-a-timer-for-a-quiz/ Unlike with surveys, you are able to apply a time limit to respondents completing a quiz. The default settings for this option set the limit to ‘0’, which means no time limit has been applied. 1. Open a quiz 2. Go to Settings in the builder sidebar 3. Expand the **Quiz** section 4. Enter a number into the field beneath ‘Time Limit’ **Note**: The number you enter into the field should represent the number of minutes you would like participants to complete the quiz in. The lowest number you’ll be able to set is ‘1’. When the time limit is up for respondents, they will be presented with the following message: “Sorry you have taken too long to answer this page.” After this, the quiz will be automatically submitted. ### How respondents see the timer The timer will appear in the top left corner of your project for respondents who are completing it, counting down in `H:MM:SS` format. When it reaches ‘0’, the form will be closed. ![Countdown timer shown in the top left corner of a quiz](/help-images/can-i-set-a-timer-for-a-quiz/timer-top-left.png) --- # Displaying Custom Score Messages https://docs.shout.com/build/quizzes/displaying-custom-score-messages/ It is possible to display customized messages to respondents once they reach your exit page. You have the option of showing messages based on their total quiz score or to also include custom messages for individual page scores. For example, you may want to display different text for someone who scored 50% to those who score 70%. ![Custom Score Message](/help-images/displaying-custom-score-messages/file-udQD9jsW7P.jpg) ## Displaying Custom Messages ![Add Custom Score Messages](/help-images/displaying-custom-score-messages/file-MHxau4GF33.png) 1. Open your Quiz 2. Go to the [Exit/ Thank You Page](/build/pages/exit-and-thank-you-pages/) (quizzes get a “Marking” exit page by default) 3. Select ‘Score/Marking page’ from the Exit page type dropdown 4. Toggle on ‘Feedback text’ 5. Click ‘Configure feedback text’ You have the choice to display these messages according to their progression in the entire quiz or to also include messages for each individual page — the dialog that opens has a ‘Total score’ tab and a tab for each page in your quiz: ![Show Custom Page Score Messages](/help-images/displaying-custom-score-messages/file-LU06TX6SaD.png) You will then need to type each of your messages next to the corresponding milestone. The default milestones for a quiz are: - 25% - 50% - 75% - 100% The 75%, 50% and 25% milestones can be changed by clicking inside the number field and typing in a new percentage. The top milestone is fixed at 100%. You can choose to include numeric totals with these messages or just the messages themselves. To do this: 1. Go to your Exit Page 2. Open the ‘Score display’ dropdown 3. Uncheck the boxes for ‘Page totals’ and ‘Individual question scores’ ![Display Custom Score Messages Only](/help-images/displaying-custom-score-messages/file-HpZniLQFIW.png) ### Message Text Formatting You are able to format the text inside the Custom Score Messages by highlighting a section of text. A floating toolbar gives you access to: - Bold - Italics - Bullet and numbered lists - Insert dynamic data (piped in from a question answer or other data field) - Link ## Removing a Custom Score Message To delete a custom score message, you just need to delete the text from the box. But you can also select the trash can icon to stop a message from appearing at that milestone. ![Remove Custom Score Messages](/help-images/displaying-custom-score-messages/file-gdcINMNw07.png) If you wish to re-insert a Custom Score Message milestone, then click ‘Add Another Message’. ![Add Another Custom Score Message](/help-images/displaying-custom-score-messages/file-FKfvzGYMLW.png) --- # How to Apply Points to Questions https://docs.shout.com/build/quizzes/how-to-apply-points-to-questions/ Before applying question points, you will have to: 1. Create questions 2. Insert answer options How you apply points will depend on what question type you use: Single Select or Multi Select. :::note **Note**: Points can only be applied to answers in Quizzes. ::: ## Single Select Questions The [Multi-Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-single-select/) question type allows you to apply a **custom amount of points** to answers. ![](/help-images/how-to-apply-points-to-questions/file-xmXBvr0UWq.png) 1. Click the answer option you wish to apply points to 2. A ‘Points’ field appears beneath the answer — input the number of points you wish to be awarded **Note**: Award points logically, making sure that questions of a similar difficulty award the same amount of points. An award system with trivial rules may confuse and deter respondents. ## Multiple Select Questions The [Multi-Choice (Multi Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-multi-select/) type requires choosing what answers are correct rather than applying points to individual answers. ![](/help-images/how-to-apply-points-to-questions/file-QTr6T0ZpIC.png) 1. Click the answer option you wish to mark as correct 2. Check the ‘Correct’ box that appears beneath it You can also customize the rules for how points are awarded: 1. Click your Multi-Choice (Multi Select) question to select it in the builder sidebar 2. Click ‘Show more settings’ to reveal the **Marking Scheme** 3. Set a number of points to be awarded upon selection in the Points field 4. Click the drop down to choose whether points are awarded upon all correct answers or each correct answer ![](/help-images/how-to-apply-points-to-questions/file-S81zBwcYZu.png) - **Matching All Correct Answers**: Points are awarded when a respondent matches all the correct answers for a question. - **Each Correct Answer**: Points are awarded for each individual correct answer respondents choose (1 point per answer). ## Text Box Questions Although the [Text Box (Single)](/build/questions/text-box-single/) and [Text Boxes (Multiple)](/build/questions/text-box-multiple/) question types are available for quizzes, it's not possible to apply points to them. --- # How to Make a Quiz https://docs.shout.com/build/quizzes/how-to-make-a-quiz/ Online quizzes are an essential tool for engaging audiences and capturing leads for your business. With our drag-and-drop quiz creator and automated scoring, you'll be able to make anything from personality quizzes to student exams and risk assessment tests effortlessly. ## Steps to Making a Quiz Below you’ll find the necessary steps to how to make a quiz: 1. [Make A Quiz](#make-a-quiz) 2. [Add Questions](#questions) 3. [Add Pages](#pages) 4. [Customizing your Quiz Design](#design) 5. [Preview and Test](#preview) 6. [Share your Quiz](#share) ### 1\. Make a Quiz You will be able to make a quiz from the Home dashboard, once you’ve logged in. 1. Go to Home and click the ‘New form’ button ![](/help-images/how-to-make-a-quiz/file-CkF8OR5inI.png) 2. Choose ‘Start from scratch’ (or describe it for AI to draft, or upload a document to convert) 3. On the ‘Set up your form’ screen, select **Quiz** as the Form type, name your quiz, and pick how many questions to show per page ![](/help-images/how-to-make-a-quiz/file-YEETgMqDTx.png) 4. Click ‘Create form’ From here you’ll be directed to the quiz builder, where you can add questions, customize settings, and tailor your quiz design. ### 2\. Adding Questions Once you’ve created your quiz, you’ll need to start adding questions. ![](/help-images/how-to-make-a-quiz/file-U9FmlGxRy4.png) 1. Open the Form tab in the sidebar 2. Click the ‘+ Question’ button 3. Select a question type (types that can contribute to a quiz score are highlighted when the ‘Quiz score’ filter is on) 4. Write answer choices 5. [Apply Question Points](/build/quizzes/how-to-apply-points-to-questions/) #### Question Types (Quizzes) You have access to a range of multiple-choice and open-ended questions. Of these, Multi-Choice (Single Select), Multi-Choice (Multi Select), Binary Yes/No and Drop Down List are flagged as usable for quiz scoring — see [How to Apply Points to Questions](/build/quizzes/how-to-apply-points-to-questions/) for how scoring actually works on each. - [Multi-Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-single-select/) - [Multi-Choice (Multi Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-multi-select/) - [Drop Down List](/build/questions/drop-down-list/) - [Comment/ Essay Box](/build/questions/comments-essay-boxes/) - [Text Box (Single)](/build/questions/text-box-single/) - [Text Boxes (Multiple)](/build/questions/text-box-multiple/) - [Picture Choice Question (Single)](/build/questions/picture-choice-single-select/) - [Picture Choice Question (Multiple)](/build/questions/picture-choice-multi-select/) - [Contact Details](/build/questions/contact-details-element-types/) - [Presentational Items](/build/text-images-and-video/list-of-presentational-items/) #### Contact Details You'll have access to a set of fields with custom settings to collect respondent information. Such as: - Email - Website - Phone Number (Validation) - Address Lookup (using Zipcode or Postcode - US/ UK only) - Contact Form (Name, Email, Address) #### Content and Media Add content other than questions into your survey to provide additional information for respondents. - Headings - Text - Images - Videos (linked from YouTube or Vimeo) ### 3\. Add Pages If your quiz is becoming too long to fit on a single page, you can insert additional pages to break up your project. This will not only make it easier for you to visualize and edit your project, but also give respondents a sense of progress and achievement in completing your quiz. #### Create a new page: 1. Open the Form tab in the left sidebar 2. Click the **+ Page** button (beneath your questions, or beneath ‘Exit pages’ for an exit page) 3. Click 'Question Page' or 'Exit Page' ![](/help-images/how-to-make-a-quiz/file-7j9pnra5ky.png) **Question Pages**: Where all your questions and form elements are placed. **Exit Pages**: These are the final pages respondents will see before they leave your project. New quizzes come with a “Marking” exit page already set up (Exit page type: ‘Score/Marking page’) so respondents see their score — see [Show or Hide Quiz Scores](/build/quizzes/show-or-hide-quiz-scores/). You can also add further exit pages to thank participants or redirect them elsewhere on completion. ### 4\. Customizing the Quiz Design Before you send your quiz, you may want to customize its visual design. Open the **Theme** tab in the builder sidebar — it also has the ‘questions per page’ option (One/Many) alongside a selection of Themes you can pick and edit to suit your design or branding. ![](/help-images/how-to-make-a-quiz/file-QKY3pGJ4Dk.png) #### Theme Colors Each theme has swatches to change the colors for text, background and highlights, plus a font swatch and a ‘Background Image’ option. ![](/help-images/how-to-make-a-quiz/file-t8Quc9M6ab.png) #### Fonts Choose from a set list of fonts for your quiz by selecting the font (‘A’) swatch, which opens the font picker. ![](/help-images/how-to-make-a-quiz/file-K7rPYi2Hz4.png) #### Add a Logo You can also add a logo to your quiz — hover over the page title to reveal ‘Add logo’ and ‘Add subheading’ buttons, plus a title-size slider. ![](/help-images/how-to-make-a-quiz/file-B9lXrV7gxc.png) ### 5\. Preview & Test You will also want to preview your project before it’s launched. This feature formats your quiz as a respondent would see it; allowing you to check the structure, functionality, and spelling/ grammar. Click the eye/‘Preview’ icon next to Publish to choose Preview, Slideout, Phone or Tablet view. ![](/help-images/how-to-make-a-quiz/file-e3LvP80AOI.png) - [How to Preview/ Test Projects](/build/surveys/how-to-preview-and-test-projects/) ### 6\. Sharing your Quiz Click the **Send** tab at the top of the builder to see all distribution methods for your quiz: ![](/help-images/how-to-make-a-quiz/file-ch1uZVFfom.png) 1. Get a link (URL) to your Quiz 2. Share (quick share to email/Facebook/X/LinkedIn/Pinterest/WhatsApp/Reddit) 3. QR Code 4. Pop-ups and slideouts (buttons for your website) 5. Embed your Project on your website (inline or drop-in code) 6. Email invitations (using your contacts) 7. Webhooks 8. JavaScript API - [Sharing your Project](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/sharing-a-report/) ### More Guides and Tips Below you’ll find a list of other useful articles concerning the project building process: - [How to Re-name your Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/renaming-a-project/) - [How to Close a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/how-to-close-a-project/) - [How to Re-Activate a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/reactivating-a-project/) - [How to Copy a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/copying-a-project/) - [Text Piping and Passing Data In](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/text-piping/) - [How to Export your Project](/results/printing-and-exporting-results/how-to-export-your-results/) - [How to Print your Project](/send/printing-and-exporting/how-to-print-a-project/) - [Labelling (Tagging) your Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/labelling-a-project-tags/) - [Can you Edit Live Projects?](/build/surveys/editing-live-projects/) - [How to Delete a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/deleting-a-project/) --- # How to Remove Question Numbering https://docs.shout.com/build/quizzes/how-to-remove-question-numbering/ Questions will be numbered automatically when inserted into your project. This feature can be disabled in two ways: - For Individual Questions - For All Questions ## To Remove Question Numbering for One Question ![](/help-images/how-to-remove-question-numbering/file-lSWflUpUez.png) 1. Go to the Builder (Form tab) 2. Click a question in the sidebar to select it 3. Disable the ‘Numbered’ switch The above method will remove numbering for a singular question. You could go through your project and remove the number for each question in this way, or use the next method to remove all numbering. ### To Remove Question Numbering for All Questions ![](/help-images/how-to-remove-question-numbering/file-i7h5JH7t4z.png) 1. Open Settings in the left sidebar of the builder 2. Expand the ‘Appearance’ section 3. Disable ‘Automatic Numbering’ This will remove the numbering for all questions, but you can enable numbering for singular questions by re-enabling its ‘Numbered’ switch when the question is selected. Note: Automatic numbering is enabled by default for all surveys, quizzes, and forms. --- # Quiz Settings https://docs.shout.com/build/quizzes/quiz-settings/ We provide a range of settings to improve not only your quiz-building experience but also a participant’s completion process. Open a quiz and click **Settings** in the builder sidebar. Options are grouped into collapsible sections — click a section heading to expand it. This article covers the settings most relevant to quizzes, grouped by the section they live in: - **Language** — no longer needs configuring (see below) - **Quiz** — Time Limit, Answer Feedback, Reveal correct answer on wrong answers - **Appearance** — Automatic Numbering (plus general form-appearance options) - **Privacy & Security** — Password Protection, Prevent Duplicate Responses - **Completion & Notifications** — Edit After Completed, Email Notifications - Show Scores — configured on the quiz’s Exit/Thank You Page itself, not in this Settings panel ## Language This used to require selecting a language and manually translating a list of key phrases. That’s no longer necessary: built-in messages now automatically display in 54 languages, with no configuration required. The Language section in Settings is just an informational notice confirming this. ## Time Limit Set a time limit for respondents to complete your quiz. Open Settings, expand the **Quiz** section, and enter the number of minutes you would like participants to complete the project within into the numeric field. Once the time limit is reached, the quiz will be automatically submitted regardless of completion. The default time limit will be 0, which means no limit will be applied. The same **Quiz** section also has two related toggles: - **Answer Feedback** (‘Show answer feedback after each question’): shows whether an answer was correct or incorrect immediately after each question. Only applies when your quiz uses one-question-per-page navigation. - **Reveal correct answer on wrong answers**: on by default — highlights the correct answer(s) in green and incorrect selections in red on the results/marking page. ## Prevent Duplicate Responses Found under **Privacy & Security**. This option limits the number of responses per computer to one, using cookies. Cookies are packets of data sent to a browser by an internet server. Each time that user accesses the same server they are identified or tracked. Preventing duplicate responses will stop the same users from completing your project more than once, therefore sustaining the integrity of your results. ## Edit After Completed Found under **Completion & Notifications**. When using the [Tracking](/send/sharing-options-and-settings/how-to-enable-tracked-responses/) feature, you can use this setting to allow respondents to edit their responses once they have submitted their completed response. If a participant feels they have made a mistake, provided incorrect information, or have simply changed their opinion concerning a subject, this option is a useful way to sanction some flexibility in changing their answer choices. ## Email Notifications Also found under **Completion & Notifications**. Receive an instant notification when a new response is submitted to your form. The same section also has a ‘Create Inbox Conversation’ toggle (on by default), which automatically creates a Inbox conversation from each response that includes a contact email address. ## Automatic Numbering Found under **Appearance**. Toggle this option to give questions numbers automatically. Of the settings on this page, this is the only one that is toggled ‘On’ by default. You can also toggle numbering for individual questions by selecting the question in the builder and disabling its ‘Numbered’ switch — see [How to Remove Question Numbering](/build/quizzes/how-to-remove-question-numbering/). ## Password Protection Found under **Privacy & Security**. Require participants to enter a password before they can complete your project. Enter your chosen password in the empty text box below the ‘Password Protection’ description. - [How to Set a Password for your project](/send/sharing-options-and-settings/how-to-set-a-password-for-your-project/). ## Show Scores Unlike the settings above, this isn’t configured in the Settings panel — it’s set on the quiz’s Exit/Thank You Page itself (quizzes get a “Marking” exit page by default). Select ‘Score/Marking page’ from that page’s Exit page type dropdown to reveal a few extra options: - **Page totals**: Shows respondents the total percentage and scores attained for each page. - **Individual question scores**: Includes correct answers, number of points scored, and the maximum number of attainable points for each question. - **Feedback text**: This allows you to write custom messages to be displayed to participants depending on the score they achieve. Messages can be configured for the total score of the quiz, and also the total score of each page. - [Show or Hide Quiz Scores](/build/quizzes/show-or-hide-quiz-scores/) --- # Show or Hide Quiz Scores https://docs.shout.com/build/quizzes/show-or-hide-quiz-scores/ Show quiz takers their scores upon completion. ![](/help-images/show-or-hide-quiz-scores/file-W4FvrGvGkV.png) 1. Open a Quiz 2. Go to the Exit/ Thank You Page (quizzes come with a “Marking” exit page by default) 3. Select ‘Score/Marking page’ from the Exit page type dropdown ### Score Page Options There are a few extra options concerning this feature, found in the ‘Score display’ dropdown on the same panel: - **Page totals**: Shows respondents the total percentage and scores attained for each page. - **Individual question scores**: Includes correct answers, number of points scored, and the maximum number of attainable points for each question. - **Feedback text** (toggle, with a ‘Configure feedback text’ button): This allows you to write custom messages to be displayed to participants depending on the score they achieve. Messages can be configured for the total score of the quiz, and also the total score of each page. Regardless of these options, if the [‘Reveal correct answer on wrong answers’](/build/quizzes/quiz-settings/) setting is on (the default), respondents also see each of their answers highlighted green (correct) or red (incorrect) directly on the marking page. Read our [Custom Score Messages](/build/quizzes/displaying-custom-score-messages/) article for more information. --- # Auto-Scroll https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/auto-scroll/ Long surveys can cause respondent disengagement and increase drop-out rates. Our Auto-Scroll feature moves respondents to the next question upon answer selection, keeping respondents engaged to ensure you don’t miss out on any data. :::tip Auto-Scroll is enabled by default. ::: ## How to disable auto-scroll ![How To Disable Auto-Scroll](/help-images/auto-scroll/file-QuMkjysEkE.png) To disable auto-scroll in your form, follow these steps: 1. Go to the Build section of your form 2. Click Settings in the left sidebar 3. Open the Appearance section 4. Switch off "Highlight next question (auto-scroll)" :::note **Note**: Auto-scroll only applies when your form is set to "Many" questions per page. If it's set to "One" question per page, the toggle isn't shown, since each page only ever has one question to scroll to. ::: --- # Can I Set a Timer for a Survey https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/can-i-set-a-timer-for-a-survey/ Unfortunately, you are not able to apply a timer to surveys. The response will be submitted once a respondent has answered every question or left the survey themselves. However, you can [set a timer for a quiz](/build/quizzes/can-i-set-a-timer-for-a-quiz/). --- # Custom Project Languages https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/custom-project-languages/ 1. Go to the build section of your project 2. Click 'Settings' in the left sidebar 3. Scroll to the language section 4. Select a language from the dropdown or click 'Add new' Select the most likely language of your participants from a pre-determined list. These include: - English - Francais (French) - Deutsch (German) You are also given the option to customize the language of your survey. This can be achieved by clicking the ‘Add New’ button beneath the drop-down list of languages. This button will open a separate menu, where you are given a list of all key phrases that are used in projects. Underneath these phrases are empty text boxes, in which you can enter translations for each. Note: You can also name the language from which these translations are derived in the ‘Name Language’ box. The key phrases for translation are: - Next Page - Finish Survey - A Password is required to view this survey - Sorry your answer was incorrect! - Sorry you have taken too long to answer this page - Please answer question - Please rank all items in question - Sorry this survey has now been closed - Previous page - You have selected more than the maximum number of answers - The maximum allowed is - Page - View Results - Vote Now - Remove answer - Finished sorting? - Skip Question? - See a summary of your results - Points Scored - Correct Answer - Final Results - A number you have entered is invalid - Please check the highlighted question - Manual Entry - You have already completed this question - SHIFT + ENTER for a new line Simply click ‘Save’ to apply your new settings. ## Prevent Duplicate Responses This option limits the number of responses per computer to one, using cookies. Cookies are packets of data sent to a browser by an internet server. Each time that user accesses the same server they are identified or tracked. Preventing duplicate responses will stop the same users from completing your project more than once, therefore sustaining the integrity of your results. --- # How to Delete Questions https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/delete-questions/ To delete a question in your survey, quiz, or calculator: 1. Open the Form tab 2. Click the ⋮ (more options) icon next to the question 3. Select Delete ![Delete Questions](/help-images/delete-questions/file-O7L20069x3.png) The question is removed immediately, with a brief "Undo" option shown in case you deleted the wrong one. :::note **Note**: If the question has already collected responses, deleting it will permanently remove those responses too. ::: --- # Can You Edit Live Projects? https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/editing-live-projects/ Once a question has collected at least one response, a lock icon appears in its toolbar with a "Responses collected, some changes disabled" banner. However, you will still have some editing capabilities on that question, and you can keep editing any question that hasn't collected responses yet as normal. ![Locked Questions](/help-images/editing-live-projects/file-5dpxDUC5du.png) The [Question Settings Bar](/build/surveys/question-quick-menu/) will still be mostly accessible, which includes: - **Required**: Make the question required, so that respondents can't move onto the next page or submit the response without answering this questions. - **Numbered**: Enable or disable the numbering for a questions. - **Option labels**: Change how answer options are labelled (e.g. A, B, C… or 1, 2, 3…). - **Rating heat bar**: Enable or disable the colored bar above scales, sliders, and matrix questions. - **Randomize**: Randomize the order of answer options below multiple-choice, dropdown, and picture choice questions. - **\# of columns**: Set the number of columns that multiple-choice answers are displayed in. A few settings do lock along with the answer options once a question has responses: - **"Other" text choice**: Add an "other" answer option to multiple-choice questions, allowing respondents to add a free form answer. - **Multiple selections (Minimum/Maximum)**: The min/max number of options a respondent must choose. - **Link to Contact detail**: Maps the question's answer to a field on the respondent's Contact record. :::note **Note**: Personally-identifiable data handling is now controlled project-wide rather than per-question: go to **Settings > Privacy & Security > Pseudonymization** to separate PII from the rest of your results. This will only apply to responses collected after the setting is enabled — it will not pseudonymize historic responses. ::: **Note**: Deleting a question once it has responses will permanently remove those responses too. ## What You Can’t Edit Once a Question Has Responses - Add new answer options - Delete answer options - Re-order answer options - Some settings (see above) In order to accomplish any of the above, click the lock icon on the question and choose **Delete responses** — this clears the responses tied to that question and unlocks it again. ## What You Can Edit in Live Projects - Edit question and answer text (this will also change the text in your results, there will be no record of the previous text) - Add Logic to questions and pages - [Re-order questions](/build/surveys/how-to-move-a-question/) - [Add/ Delete NEW questions](/build/surveys/how-to-add-and-edit-questions/) - [Customizing Survey Themes](/build/themes/customizing-themes/) - [Edit Survey Settings](/build/surveys/survey-settings/) - [Change/ Add a Logo](/build/text-images-and-video/adding-and-editing-logos/) - [Editing page titles and descriptions](/build/pages/page-titles-and-descriptions/) - [Add/ delete new pages](/build/pages/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/) :::caution Once your project is live, we’d recommend editing it as little as possible. This is because any changes you make may not be reflected in your results. _E.g._ If you attempt to shift answer options around by editing the text for each field, the responses would continue to correspond with the original text field, and not the new text. ::: --- # Hidden Fields (API) https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/hidden-fields-api/ This option allows you to pipe text from ‘Hidden Fields’ using a QueryString or JavaScript API. These terms simply refer to the way of creating applications that access the features or data of other digital services. You would be using this component to retrieve relevant data on your respondents, from a source external to this site. #### Step One: Defining your Data Before you can incorporate this type of Text Piping, you will need to define what kind of data you want ‘passed in’ to your project. To do this you will need to insert the **External Datasource (hidden questions)** element, which you'll find under the "Special" category in the Question Library. Once added, it's labelled "Hidden Fields" in your question list. ![](/help-images/hidden-fields-api/file-PObISIy69N.png) Then input the names of your fields, and all data will be stored as a string. ![](/help-images/hidden-fields-api/file-zdC2bB0WrH.png) Note: Field name must contain no spaces, and only ‘\*\*-\*\*‘ or ‘\*\*\_\*\*’ as special characters. #### Step Two: Passing the data in There are two ways to ‘pass data in’ to your survey from an external source. The first of these is by using Querystring parameters, whilst the second employs the JavaScript API. #### Querystring Parameters This method requires you to have used the hyperlink launch option. For the data to be unique to each respondent, you would have to generate the link server side. Below you will see an example of a standard survey link, without the Querystring parameters applied. _**https://shout.com/s/**__**5urV3yc0de**_ Add your parameter names to the querystring exactly as you entered them as field names in Step One — no prefix is needed. See the example below, for fields named `name` and `email`: _https://shout.com/s/5urV3yc0de**?name=Jeff&email=luke@example.com**_ As you can see above, the fields included in this Querystring are: - name=Jeff - email=luke@example.com The first half of each parameter (everything before the “\*\*=\*\*”) must exactly match a field name entered in Step One, whilst the second half provides the corresponding information. #### JavaScript API This method allows you to embed your project directly into your website. It’s a great alternative when standard embed button codes or placeholder codes do not fully suit your requirements. Note: You will need a basic understanding of JavaScript to use this method. Simply add a property called “custom” to the config object, this may contain a single level object of strings. Example below: `{ formId: "###", custom: { userId: "32453", firstName: "Luke", lastName: "Smith", email: "luke@shout.com" } }` For more information on how to employ JavaScript API, please refer to [this article](/send/sending-a-project/javascript-api/). ### Step Three: Using the data in the live survey (optional) The data stored by either of the above methods can be used in your live survey, through the ‘Hidden Fields’ element discussed in Step One. ### Step Four: Passing the data out in a redirect URL (optional) You can pass information back to your website for confirmation that a respondent has completed your survey/project. To do this, select your [Exit Page](/build/pages/exit-and-thank-you-pages/) in the project builder. You will see three options: - Standard (with advertising) - Design Custom Page - Redirect to Web Address Select the ‘Redirect to Web Address’ option, and enter the URL of the site you wish respondents to be directed to in the space provided. Below is an example of how you can customize this URL with a unique code, so your website records respondents being redirected. _[https://mywebsite\[dot\]com/confirmationpage?email=\[email\]](https://mywebsite[dot]com/confirmationpage?email=[email])_ The \[email\] section will be replaced with the input email address from the QueryString parameters or JavaScript API call you passed earlier. --- # How to Add and Edit Questions https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/how-to-add-and-edit-questions/ Once you've created and named a survey or quiz, you'll need to start adding questions. ## Adding a New Question ![Add New Survey Questions](/help-images/how-to-add-and-edit-questions/file-TbD7rwL3dp.png) 1. Open the Form tab in the sidebar 2. Click the 'Question' button (with a + icon) beneath your last question 3. Select a question type from the Question Library 4. Enter question and answer text in the builder **Note**: Your form will save automatically, to stop you from losing any work. ## Typing Text Directly You can also click the empty "Click to add text or a question" area on a page and just start typing. This creates a Paragraph text block containing what you typed. If you actually meant to ask a question, click the "Convert to question" button that appears — this opens the Question Library so you can pick the right question type, with your typed text carried over as the question text. If you want to switch a question's type after adding it, you can do this without recreating the question: 1. Click the question you'd like to change the question type of 2. Open the "Item / Question type" dropdown, shown above the question next to the image and video icons ![Switch Question Type](/help-images/how-to-add-and-edit-questions/file-w7Ry0LFrTk.png) 3. Select a new question type from the same Question Library shown above ## Question Settings Clicking a question in the builder will reveal its settings inline, in the sidebar beneath it: ![Question Settings](/help-images/how-to-add-and-edit-questions/file-GYeOXreomm.png) For information on the available settings for questions, take a look at this article: [Question Quick Menu](/build/surveys/question-quick-menu/). --- # How to Add Pictures to Questions https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/how-to-add-pictures-to-questions/ It's possible to add images to question fields in your surveys, quizzes and forms. To do this: 1. Go to the Build section of your form 2. Click a question to select it 3. Click the image icon in the toolbar above the question 4. Choose "For question" from the menu that appears (choose "For page" instead if you want the image to apply to the whole page)![How To Add Pictures To Questions](/help-images/how-to-add-pictures-to-questions/file-fOA7fGzkmB.png) 5. Select or upload an image from the Photo, Video, or Upload / My Gallery tabs --- # How to Copy Questions https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/how-to-copy-questions/ You're able to duplicate questions in your survey, along with any settings you have applied. ## How to Copy a Question ![The question's ⋮ menu open, showing Cut, Copy, Paste below, Duplicate, Logic, Configure image, Move to page, Ask AI, Turn into, Insert question or item, and Delete](/help-images/how-to-copy-questions/file-LqWTemKxQw.png) 1. Go to the Builder 2. Click the ⋮ icon next to the question you'd like to copy 3. Select **'Duplicate'** The duplicate question will appear directly below the original. :::note **Note**: The same ⋮ menu also has a **'Copy'** option — that copies the question to your clipboard (`Ctrl+C`) so you can paste it elsewhere with **'Paste below'**, rather than duplicating it in place. For a same-spot copy, use **'Duplicate'**. ::: :::note **Note**: All settings will be copied along with the question, including any Text Piping or Question Logic applied to the question. ::: --- # How to Create a Survey https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/how-to-create-a-survey/ Create online surveys quickly and easily, whether you're conducting market research, monitoring employee engagement or gauging customer satisfaction. ## Steps to Creating a Survey 1. [Create and Name your Survey](#create) 2. [Add Questions](#question-types) 3. [Add Pages](#pages) 4. [Apply Logic (Optional)](#logic) 5. [Customizing your Survey Design](#design) 6. [Preview and Test](#test) 7. [Share your Survey](#share) :::tip **One question per page**: Under 'Questions per page' you can choose 'One per page' for a step-through, single-question-at-a-time layout instead of the classic scrollable 'Many per page' layout. This can help keep respondents engaged and improve completion rates. ::: ### 1\. Create a Survey Once you log in to your account, you'll be taken to your Home dashboard. Surveys now live under **Forms** in the left-hand navigation, alongside Quizzes and Calculators. 1. Click **Forms** in the top navigation 2. Click the **'New Form'** button, top right of your forms list ![Forms dashboard, with the New Form button top right](/help-images/how-to-create-a-survey/file-rq635dEjL3.png) 3. You'll land on **'What would you like to build?'** — describe your survey and click **'Build with AI'** to have it drafted for you, upload a document (PDF/DOCX/CSV/TXT) to convert into a survey, or click **'Start from scratch'** for a blank canvas ![The 'What would you like to build?' screen, with an AI prompt box, Upload a document, and Start from scratch options](/help-images/how-to-create-a-survey/file-newform-ai-intro.png) 4. If you started from scratch, you'll land on **'Set up your form'**: name your project, pick a workspace, choose the **Form type** (**Survey**, **Quiz**, or **Calculator**), and choose **Questions per page** (**One per page** or **Many per page**) ![The 'Set up your form' screen, with Form type and Questions per page options](/help-images/how-to-create-a-survey/file-eGWvoWsX2O.png) 5. Click **'Create form'** You'll then be taken to the survey builder, with a default survey template. From here you can add questions, customize settings, tailor your survey design, and add branding. :::note **Note**: Describing your survey to the AI (or uploading a document) skips the 'Set up your form' step and drafts the questions for you directly — you can still change the form type, questions-per-page, and everything else afterwards in the Builder. ::: ### 2\. Adding Questions and Answers Once you’ve created your survey, you'll be taken to the Survey Builder. You can add a title to your page by clicking and editing the title, which will be 'Page 1' by default. #### Using AI to Draft Questions There's no longer a separate 'Question Prediction' panel sitting above the builder. Instead, AI is built into the editor itself: - Click into any empty text/question block and type **'@'** to open **'Ask AI for question generation…'** inline ![Typing @ in an empty block opens an inline 'Ask AI for question generation' bar](/help-images/how-to-create-a-survey/file-rb9OXUg6VI.png) - Type **'/'** instead to open a quick menu of question types and content items - Or use **'Build with AI'** / **'Upload a document'** right when you [create the survey](#create) to have the whole draft generated at once If a question's type isn't what you wanted, switch it using the **'Item / Question type'** dropdown on the right of the question. #### Adding Questions Manually Alternatively, you can manually add questions to your survey via the Form tab in the left sidebar. Simply click **'+ Question'** below the page you'd like to add your new question to, to reveal the Question Library: ![The Question Library, grouped into Content Items, Standard Questions, Contact Details, Special, Multi-Factor, Picture Choices, and Split Testing, with a hover preview](/help-images/how-to-create-a-survey/file-TbD7rwL3dp.png) Then click any question type in the library to add it into your survey. Hovering an option shows a live preview of what it looks like. #### Question Types Here's a list of the question types available for use in surveys, grouped as they appear in the Question Library: - [Multiple Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-single-select/) - [Multiple Choice (Multi Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-multi-select/) - [Binary Yes/No](/build/questions/binary-question/) - [Opinion Scale](/build/questions/opinion-scales/) - [Star Rating](/build/questions/star-rating/) - [Drop Down List](/build/questions/drop-down-list/) - [Order Ranking](/build/questions/order-rankings/) - Opinion Slider and Numeric Slider (formerly the single [Slider](/build/questions/sliders/) type, now split in two) - [Comments/ Essay Box](/build/questions/comments-essay-boxes/) - [Text Box (Single)](/build/questions/text-box-single/) - [Text Box (Multiple)](/build/questions/text-box-multiple/) - Number / Money - [Date](/build/questions/date/) - [Date Range](/build/questions/date-range/) - Payment - [Matrix Question](/build/questions/matrix-common-scale/) - [Multi Factor Scale](/build/questions/multi-factor-scales/) - Multi-Factor Opinion Slider (formerly [Multi Factor Slider](/build/questions/multi-factor-sliders/)) - Picture Choice (single and multi-select are now one combined [Picture Choice](/build/questions/picture-choice-single-select/) type) - [Picture Comments](/build/questions/picture-comments/) - [Net Promoter Score®](/build/surveys/net-promoter-score-question/) - Consent, eSignature, External Datasource (hidden questions), Restart Form Button, and File Upload — newer 'Special' category types - AB Text, AB Image, and AB Video — for split-testing question variants :::note **Note**: 'Multi-Select Drop Down List' is no longer a distinct type in the library — 'Drop Down List' now covers single-select, with multi-select handled via Multiple Choice (Multi Select). ::: #### Contact Details You'll have access to a set of fields with custom settings to collect respondent information, and which can prefill from or update the contact record. Such as: - [Email address](/build/questions/email-address-field/) - Full Name - Telephone number - Language - [Address Lookup](/build/questions/zip-postcode-lookup-element/) (using Zipcode or Postcode - US/ UK only) - Compact Contact Form (formerly [Contact Form](/build/questions/contact-form-element/)) More on [Contact Details](/build/questions/contact-details-element-types/). #### Content and Media Add content other than questions into your survey to provide additional information for respondents. These now live under **'Content Items'** at the top of the Question Library: - Heading / Greeting - [Paragraph text](/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-text/) - [Images](/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-images/) - [Videos](/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-a-video/) (linked from YouTube or Vimeo) List of [Presentational Items](/build/text-images-and-video/list-of-presentational-items/). ### 3\. Add and Manage Pages If your survey is becoming too long to fit on a single page, you can [insert additional pages](/build/pages/how-to-add-and-manage-pages/) to break up your project. This will not only make it easier for you to visualize and edit your project, but also give respondents a sense of progress and achievement in completing your survey. Pages can also be used for specific purposes; such as in creating disqualification pages or consent forms. **To create a new page:** 1. Open the Form tab in the left sidebar 2. Click **'+ Page'**, below the last item on an existing page 3. Choose to add a **Question Page** or an **Exit Page** ![The '+ Page' menu, with Question Page and Exit Page options](/help-images/how-to-create-a-survey/file-RTZbJlTRxc.png) - **Question Pages**: Where all your questions and form elements are placed. - **Exit Pages**: These are the final pages respondents will see before they leave your project. They can be used to thank participants, or even to direct them to a site upon completion. ### 4\. Applying Logic Use Logic to create custom paths for respondents moving through your survey. There are two types of navigation Logic you can use, Page Logic and Question Logic. If you want to show or hide questions or pages without sending respondents to a different page, use [Conditional Display](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/conditional-display/). #### Question Logic [Question Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/default-logic/): This logic determines where respondents are sent to once they click 'Next Page'. By default, respondents will be sent to the next page chronologically this Logic allows you to change that. :::note **Note:** Question logic will override Page Logic. ::: #### Page Logic [Page Logic](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/page-logic/): This allows you to customize the path respondents take through your survey based on answer choices respondents make. Some examples of using Page Logic include: A few examples for using Logic are: - Collect consent: Send respondents who don't give consent straight to an exit page. - Disqualify respondents: Send respondents who don't match your target audience to an exit page. - Personalized Question Paths: Send respondents to different survey pages based on their answers. ### 5\. Customizing Survey Design Before you distribute your survey, you may want to customize the visual design of your project. To change your survey theme, click the **Theme** icon in the left sidebar (between Form and Settings). This also holds the **Questions per page** (One/Many) setting you chose at creation, if you want to change it later. ![The Theme tab: Questions per page, a Themes gallery with a Theme type dropdown, and the selected theme's swatches](/help-images/how-to-create-a-survey/file-bGazTn85UB.png) #### Theme Colors and Fonts Colors and fonts are now set together, via a compact row of controls under your selected theme: swatches for **Background Color**, **Text Color**, and **Question Highlight Color**, an **'A'** icon for **Font Set**, and a **'Background Image'** button. ![The color and font swatch row under the selected theme: Background Color, Text Color, Question Highlight Color, Font Set, and Background Image](/help-images/how-to-create-a-survey/file-qVkplOQlnE.png) :::note **Note**: Switching the **Theme type** (e.g. from 'Modern' to 'Seasonal') resets any custom colors and fonts you've set — you'll get a confirmation prompt before this happens. ::: #### Add a Logo You can also [add a logo to your survey](/build/text-images-and-video/adding-and-editing-logos/), via the **'Add logo'** button above the page title in the canvas. ![The Change Logo popup, with Change/Remove buttons and a field to link the logo to a URL](/help-images/how-to-create-a-survey/file-lgc9Uv4rES.png) ### 6\. Previewing/ Testing ![The Preview options bar: Preview, Slideout, Phone, and Tablet](/help-images/how-to-create-a-survey/file-O62aEoCNtQ.png) Clicking the eye (Preview) icon, next to Publish in the top bar, will allow you to test your survey without the response being saved in your results. [How to Preview/ Test Projects](/build/surveys/how-to-preview-and-test-projects/). ### 7\. Share your Survey Click **'Send'** in the top bar to see the distribution methods available, listed in the left sidebar: 1. Get a link (URL) to share your survey 2. Share to social sites, or Target a Survey Audience (Purchasing Survey Responses) 3. QR Code 4. Pop-ups and slideouts for your website 5. Embed your Project on your Website inline with your content 6. [Email Invitations](/send/sending-a-project/sending-surveys-via-email-invitation/) 7. Webhooks 8. JavaScript API - [Sharing your Project](/send/sending-a-project/sharing-your-project/) ### More Guides and Tips Below you’ll find a list of other useful articles to help you get started: - [How to Re-name your Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/renaming-a-project/) - [Close a Survey to Responses](/projects/managing-your-projects/how-to-close-a-project/) - [How to Re-Activate a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/reactivating-a-project/) - [How to Copy a Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/copying-a-project/) - [Text Piping and Passing Data In](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/text-piping/) - [How to Export your Data](/results/printing-and-exporting-results/how-to-export-your-results/) - [How to Print your Survey](/send/printing-and-exporting/how-to-print-a-project/) - [Labelling (Tagging) your Project](/projects/managing-your-projects/labelling-a-project-tags/) - [Can you Edit Live Projects?](/build/surveys/editing-live-projects/) - [How to Delete a Survey](/projects/managing-your-projects/deleting-a-project/) --- # How to Insert a Link https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/how-to-insert-a-link/ You can insert a hyperlink into any section of text within a project, as well as being able to link your logo to an external website. ## Insert a Link in Text Create hyperlinks to external pages in your surveys and quizzes. ![The text formatting toolbar above a highlighted word, showing Bold, Italic, bullet list, numbered list, variable, and link icons](/help-images/how-to-insert-a-link/file-Il2X1nNsMN.png) 1. Highlight the text you wish to link 2. A formatting toolbar appears above the selection — select the link icon 3. Enter a URL in the box that appears 4. Click the checkmark to save :::note **Note**: There's no separate 'Insert Link' menu item anymore — selecting text and clicking the link icon opens the URL box directly. ::: Links now open in a new tab automatically when a respondent clicks them — there's no 'Open Link in New Tab' checkbox to set. ## Removing a Link ![Clicking a linked word shows a small popup with the target URL, an edit (pencil) icon, an unlink icon, and an open-in-new icon](/help-images/how-to-insert-a-link/file-i3OLdvIJAm.png) 1. Click the hyperlinked text 2. A small popup appears showing the link's URL — select the unlink icon (a chain-link with a slash through it) The link will then be removed from the text. The same popup also has a pencil icon to edit the URL, and an 'open in new tab' icon to test the link. ## Add a Link to your Logo ![The Change Logo popup, with Change and Remove buttons and an 'On click go to web address' field](/help-images/how-to-insert-a-link/file-KV3HF7M5rQ.png) 1. Add a logo 2. Click the logo to open the **'Change Logo'** popup 3. Enter a URL into the **'On click go to web address:'** field **Note**: Whenever a respondent clicks your logo, they will be redirected to the website you linked. To remove this link, simply click the logo again and clear the URL from the field. --- # How to Make a Question Required https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/how-to-make-a-question-required/ Making a question required means that respondents will have to answer that question before they can finish the survey/ quiz/ form. Most questions aren't required by default, but this option can be toggled through the Question Settings Bar for each individual question. ## Making a Question Required ![The Question Settings Bar under a selected question, showing the Required and Numbered toggles and a Show more settings link](/help-images/how-to-make-a-question-required/file-kp9Tjl74dm.png) 1. Go to the Builder 2. Click the question you want to make required, in the Form tab's page list 3. Toggle **'Required'** on in the Question Settings Bar that expands underneath it A small asterisk appears next to the question in the canvas once it's required. **Note**: The required status of a question is always visible in the Question Settings Bar for the selected question. The toggle is filled in (checked) for required questions and empty for those that aren't. --- # How To Make A Survey Anonymous https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/how-to-make-a-survey-anonymous/ All surveys, quizzes, forms, and calculators you create are **anonymous by default**. We don't even store respondent IP addresses. So, there's no specific setting you need to enable or disable. ## How to ensure responses remain anonymous To ensure your responses are still anonymous: - Avoiding collecting personal information, such as name and email addresses. - Don't enable tracking when sending via email invitation. ## Collecting personal information in anonymous surveys Usually, if you collect personal data in a survey, the responses are no longer anonymous. However, with our Pseudonymization feature you can store personal data and responses separately. Allowing you to know who has responded or update your contact records without knowing responses to other questions. You'll find this toggle in the Builder, under **Settings > Privacy & Security > Pseudonymization**. Read more about [Pseudonymization](/build/surveys/pseudonymization/). --- # How to Move a Question https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/how-to-move-a-question/ To move questions to a different place in your project, you can drag and drop them into place inside the Form tab. ## How to Move a Question ![Dragging a question in the Form tab's page list, with a drop-position line showing where it will land](/help-images/how-to-move-a-question/file-5KHvnNNmut.png) 1. Open the Form tab 2. Hover over a question 3. Click and hold the ⋮⋮ icon 4. Drag and drop the question into a new place :::tip **Tip**: You can drag and drop questions onto different pages — just keep dragging up or down past the page boundary until you see the drop line under the page you want. ::: ## Moving a Question Without Dragging If the question needs to move somewhere further down a long survey, dragging can be fiddly. As an alternative: 1. Click the ⋮ icon next to the question 2. Select **'Move to page'** 3. Choose the destination page from the dropdown 4. Click **'Move'** This drops the question at the end of the destination page without needing to drag it across the screen. --- # How to Preview and Test Projects https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/how-to-preview-and-test-projects/ Previewing allows you to view your project in the same way as you respondents would. You’ll want to do this in order to copy-proof your project and to make sure all aspects of it are working as expected. We would recommend that you take full advantage of this feature, as you will have limited editing abilities once you’ve launched your project. In the top bar above the project builder, you'll see the eye icon (labelled 'Preview' on hover) next to the Publish button. ![The Build/Send/Results top bar, with the Preview (eye) icon next to Publish](/help-images/how-to-preview-and-test-projects/file-xpEribbbe1.png) ## Preview Options This function gives you control over how you will preview and test your project. Hovering or clicking it opens a bar with four options: ![The Preview options bar: Preview, Slideout, Phone, and Tablet](/help-images/how-to-preview-and-test-projects/file-O62aEoCNtQ.png) - **Preview**: Opens your project as an overlay in the centre of your current screen — not a separate browser tab. - **Slideout**: Preview your project as a slideout bar, sliding from the left to the center. - **Phone**: Check what your project will look like on mobile devices. - **Tablet**: View how your project will look on tablets. :::note **Note**: The old separate 'New Tab' and 'Popout' options have been merged into the single 'Preview' option above, which opens as an in-page overlay rather than a new browser tab. ::: ### Testing your Project Once you’ve chosen a preview option, you can fill out your project as a respondent would. :::note **Note**: Completing your project whilst in Preview Mode will not add responses to your results. ::: Simply click the ‘X’ in the top right of your preview to close it. --- # How to Randomize the Answer Order https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/how-to-randomize-the-answer-order/ By default, answers will appear in the order you wrote them. Randomizing your answer order will decrease any chance of order bias, and will improve the quality of your results. Having a random answer order will reduce bias in your project. You can access this feature through the [Question Settings Bar](/build/surveys/question-quick-menu/). :::note This setting is only available for Multiple-Choice, Dropdown, and Picture Choice questions. ::: ## Applying Answer Randomization ![The Question Settings Bar with the Randomize toggle enabled, alongside Link to Contact detail and 'Other' text choice](/help-images/how-to-randomize-the-answer-order/file-yfpIUrPrBN.png) 1. Go to the Builder 2. Click a question 3. In the Question Settings Bar, click **'Show more settings'** 4. Enable the switch for **'Randomize'** The answer options will now be randomized for respondents. :::note **Note**: 'Randomize' is tucked under 'Show more settings' now, alongside options like 'Other' text choice — it isn't shown by default next to Required and Numbered. ::: ## Removing Answer Randomization 1. Go to the Builder 2. Click a question 3. Click **'Show more settings'** if the panel is collapsed 4. Disable the switch **'Randomize'** OFF --- # Limit the Number of Answers a Respondent can Select https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/limit-the-number-of-answers-a-respondent-can-select/ Most [Question Types](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/) only allow respondents to select one answer option. However, both the [Multi-Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-single-select/) OR [(Multi-Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-multi-select/) and Picture Choice types can be optimized for multiple answer selection. ## To edit the number of answers a respondent can select ![](/help-images/limit-the-number-of-answers-a-respondent-can-select/file-mFBqCG1OVO.png) 1. Insert a Multi-Choice (Single Select or Multi Select) or Picture Choice question type 2. Click the question to open its settings panel in the Form tab 3. Click **Show more settings** 4. Under **Multiple selections**, open the **Minimum** and/or **Maximum** drop-downs 5. Select a number in either/ both lists These numbers represent the number of answers a respondent will be able to/ will have to choose. :::note **Note**: You will see ‘Maximum’ listed amongst the numbers in the Maximum list; this means that participants can choose as many answers as are available. Conversely, the 'None' under the Minimum list means that no minimum will be applied. ::: --- # Move a Question to a different Page https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/move-a-question-to-a-different-page/ To move a question to a different page: 1. Open the Form tab 2. Hover over the question you'd like to move 3. Click and hold the ⋮⋮ icon next to the question 4. Drag and drop the question to a different page in the Form tab ![Move Questions To Another Page](/help-images/move-a-question-to-a-different-page/file-MvMzEzDFxT.png) --- # Net Promoter Score Question Type https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/net-promoter-score-question/ Calculating your Net Promoter Score will help you measure customer loyalty to your brand. You can do this by asking one simple question: " _How likely are you to recommend us to a friend or colleague?_" ![Net Promoter Score Question](/help-images/net-promoter-score-question/file-G0x8n18RjL.jpg) Customers will choose a rating from 0 to 10 (Not at all Likely - Extremely Likely) and will be grouped into three categories based on their rating. - Those who select between 0 and 6 are Demoters (red). - Those who select either 7 and 8 are Passives (orange). - Those who select either 9 or 10 are Promoters (green). ## How to add a Net Promoter Score question ![How To Add A Net Promoter Score Question To A Survey](/help-images/net-promoter-score-question/file-rNGag8AbrC.png) To add an NPS question to your survey, follow these steps: 1. Open the **Form** tab 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Select **Net Promoter Score®** from the **Special** category (use the search box if it's easier to find) ## Analyzing Net Promoter Score Your NPS is automatically calculated by us. Your score and number of Demoters, Passives and Promoters is compiled into a graph for you. You will also be able to view the number of responses for each point in the scale, from 0 to 10. ![](/help-images/net-promoter-score-question/file-PY0IdBDz9I.jpg) ## How is NPS calculated? To calculate your Net Promoter Score, your percentage of Detractors is subtracted from your percentage of Promoters. The resulting number is your NPS score and will be between -100 and +100. ## Question Settings Clicking an NPS question reveals its settings panel in the Form tab. **Required** and **Numbered** are shown immediately; click **Show more settings** to reveal the rest: - **Numbered**: This button toggles the numbering for the concerned question. - **Personal info**: Only appears once [Pseudonymization](/build/surveys/pseudonymization/) is enabled for the survey (Settings > Privacy & Security). When enabled, the data from any question marked as PII in the question settings will be stored as a separate response. Allowing you to identify who has completed your survey, and at what time, without viewing the other answers they've given. - **Rating Heat Bar**: This allows you to toggle the visibility of the Rating Heat Bar. This is for visual purposes only, and cannot be interacted with by respondents. - **Required**: By checking this box, respondents cannot finish the survey without completing the question. ### Filtering by NPS You'll be able to filter your report by responses from Promoters, Passives and Detractors. Allowing you to create separate reports for each customer group, meaning you can compile actionable feedback to improve the experience for each group. 1. Go to the **Results** tab 2. Click **Filter & Compare** in the sidebar 3. Click 'Add Filter' 4. Filter by 'Question' 5. Select your NPS question 6. Tick the boxes for each group - Tick 0 to 6 to create a report for your Detractors. - Tick 7 and 8 to create a report for your Passives - Tick 9 and 10 to create a report for your Promoters You will need to [copy your report](/results/customizing-and-sharing-reports/copying-a-report/) and follow these steps in each to create separate reports for each group. ### Compare data sets by NPS You can also compare the results from Promoters, Passives and Detractors in the same report. #### Create a comparison group for Detractors 1. Go to the **Results** tab 2. Click **Filter & Compare** 3. Click 'Add Comparison' 4. Select your NPS question 5. Tick the boxes from 0 to 6 #### Create a comparison group for Passives 1. Go to the **Results** tab 2. Click **Filter & Compare** 3. Click 'Add Comparison' 4. Select your NPS question 5. Tick the boxes for 7 and 8 #### Create a comparison group for Promoters 1. Go to the **Results** tab 2. Click **Filter & Compare** 3. Click 'Add Comparison' 4. Select your NPS question 5. Tick the boxes for 9 and 10 You will now see 4 charts/ graphs for each question in your report: - All data - Detractors - Passives - Promoters Open the Filter & Compare panel and click the tick next to the 'All data' view to hide this in your results. Then you will only see the comparisons for each of your NPS customer groups. --- # One Question at a Time Surveys https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/one-question-surveys/ This survey format displays questions to respondents one at a time, rather than several to a page. This survey type will help to keep your respondents engaged when answering your questions, improving your completion rates. When respondents choose an answer, they'll be taken to the next question seamlessly. This ensures that people aren't overwhelmed by a full page of questions, and creates a sense of flow through your survey. ## Creating a One Question at a Time Survey To get started with one question surveys, simply follow these steps: 1. Click **New form** on your dashboard 2. Choose **Start from scratch** (or describe it to **Build with AI**, or upload a document) 3. On the **Set up your form** screen, keep **Survey** selected under **Form type** 4. Under **Questions per page**, choose **One per page** 5. Click **Create form** ## ![](/help-images/one-question-surveys/file-RVD6hz2zeM.png)Adding Questions to a One Question Survey Whilst you create these surveys in much the same way as the Many per page format, each section has its own **+ Question** button so you can manage everything in the builder. ![](/help-images/one-question-surveys/file-mrG8l0i121.png) To add a question to a section: 1. Open the **Form** tab 2. Click **+ Question** beneath the section you want to add it to 3. Select a question type from the library This inserts the new question directly after the last item in that section. ## Adding Sections to One Question Surveys Sections allow you to split questions up by relevance, and will be displayed on the [Progress Bar](/send/sharing-options-and-settings/the-progress-bar/) if you have this enabled. ![](/help-images/one-question-surveys/file-mqjDY7yNS6.png) To add a new section to your survey: 1. Open the **Form** tab 2. Click **+ Section** (or click the **⋮** icon next to a section title and choose **Add section**) 3. Choose a **Question Section** or **Exit Section** Question sections are spaces for you to ask questions, whereas Exit Sections are the final message respondents will see after finishing their response. ## Using Logic in One Question Surveys It's important to note that Logic does not work on a per question basis, it can only be used to send respondents to a different section (much the same as it works in the Many per page survey format). 1. Open the **Form** tab 2. Hover over a question you'd like to apply logic to 3. Click the **⋮** icon next to your question title 4. Select **Logic**![](/help-images/one-question-surveys/file-wB06iwKWHm.png) 5. A dropdown appears beneath each of your (filled-in) answer options, defaulting to "Next Section (Default)"![](/help-images/one-question-surveys/file-yOJLVaNi1G.png) 6. Open the dropdown beneath an answer option and select the section it should jump to Your Logic will look something like this when it's set up: ![](/help-images/one-question-surveys/file-2j4vLNE6kK.png) --- # How to Add an Other Answer Option https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/other-answer-options/ The "Other" answer option allows respondents to write a freeform answer for a question. These alternatives are useful for a few reasons. Firstly, you may not have the time or space to list a full set of answers to a question. Secondly, you may forget or fail to include answer options that respondents consider to be relevant. Lastly, it gives your respondents more agency in the completion process by providing space for a personal answer. ![](/help-images/other-answer-options/file-0WcJ5EcF8I.png) ## How to Add an 'Other' Answer Option 1. Click a question to open its settings panel 2. Click **Show more settings** 3. Enable the '"Other" text choice' switch 4. A new answer field will be inserted containing the text "Other (Please Specify)" ## Which Question Types can have an 'Other' Answer Option? - [Multi-Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-single-select/) - [Multi-Choice (Multi-Select)](/build/questions/multichoice-multi-select/) - [Drop Down List](/build/questions/drop-down-list/) - Picture Choice :::note Matrix (Common Scale) questions no longer offer an 'Other' text choice option in the current builder. ::: ## How Respondents Interact with the Other Box The "Other" option will operate as a [Text Box (Single)](/build/questions/text-box-single/), where participants can click the answer field and enter a short amount of text. ## How to Delete an 'Other' Answer Option You remove these answer types in the same way you'd delete any other. Click into the field you wish to remove and an 'X' will appear at the bottom-right of the answer box. ![](/help-images/other-answer-options/file-dJs1FwECgv.png) Alternatively, you can disable the "Other" text choice switch in the question's settings panel (click the question, then **Show more settings**). --- # Collect Personal Data in Anonymous Surveys (Pseudonymization) https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/pseudonymization/ Pseudonymization allows you to collect personal information (such as names as email addresses) whilst ensuring that responses to other questions remain anonymous. This is the perfect feature for those that need to track survey responses or update personal data on record, but want to encourage honest responses. ## How does Pseudonymization work? When creating a survey, you can mark questions that collect personal data. Then when you collect responses, the answers to those questions are stored separately to all other question data. The order of responses is randomized, and it's not possible to link the personal data back to the response data. We also recommend setting a Minimum Response Quota via the survey settings. This locks access to your results until a minimum response threshold is met. This is important as it means you can't identify your first responders by the fact there is no one else that could have submitted that response. Let's get into how to set up Pseudonymization in your surveys. ## Step 1: Enable Pseudonymization ![Enable Pseudonymization](/help-images/pseudonymization/file-X0A1U0wbum.png) 1. Go to the Build section of your survey 2. Click the **Settings** icon in the left sidebar 3. Open **Privacy & Security** 4. Enable the **Pseudonymization** toggle ## Step 2: Mark questions that collect personal data ![Mark Questions That Collect Personal Data](/help-images/pseudonymization/file-RH6AI7CK7s.png) 1. Click a question in your survey to reveal its settings panel 2. Click **Show more settings** if it isn't already expanded 3. Enable the switch beneath "Personal info" :::note The "Personal info" switch only appears on a question once Pseudonymization has been enabled in Step 1 above. ::: ## Step 3: Set a minimum response quota ![Set a Minimum Response Quota](/help-images/pseudonymization/file-Qet9sneY60.png) 1. Click **Settings** in the left sidebar 2. Open **Privacy & Security** 3. Click the 'Minimum responses' dropdown 4. Select a number from the list For the integrity of anonymization, you must select a minimum required response count. Once you've done this, it will not be possible to collect your responses until the minimum quota has been met. :::caution **Warning**: once you have started collecting responses, this setting can only be increased. ::: ## Using email tracking with pseudonymization When using Pseudonymization with tracking, the tracked data will be linked to the PII response data only. I.e. the tracking information will not be linked to other response data. Read more about tracking. ## Viewing pseudonymized response data When viewing your results, the anonymous information will be available in the same report as the tracked personal information, but stored separately.![Pseudonymized Responses](/help-images/pseudonymization/file-4pQxPch0Ok.png) To view the separated anonymous and PII data, open **Results → Responses** and select a row. The response sheet shows the applicable PII and anonymized fields. You will notice that the time, date, referrer, location, and any tracking data is not available when viewing anonymized information. ### Exporting PII and anonymized data Separate spreadsheets for PII and 'anonymous data' can be downloaded from the Export option in the Results sidebar. --- # Question Settings https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/question-quick-menu/ ## What is the Question Settings panel? The Question Settings panel allows you to edit certain question formats and settings. ## How can I access the Question Settings panel? You can access this panel by clicking any [Question Type](/build/questions/list-of-question-types/) in the Form tab — this reveals the question's settings directly beneath it, in the same left-hand list. Only **Required** and **Numbered** are shown by default; click **Show more settings** to reveal the rest of the options below. ![](/help-images/question-quick-menu/file-GYeOXreomm.png) ## Menu Contents The complete list of Question Settings options can be found below. Which of these appear depends on the question type selected: - **Personal info:** Only appears once [Pseudonymization](/build/surveys/pseudonymization/) has been enabled for the survey (Settings > Privacy & Security). When enabled, the data from any question marked as PII will be stored separately to other response data. Allowing you to identify who has completed your survey, and at what time, without viewing the other answers they've given. - **Required**: This option will appear as a switch. When on, it will force respondents to complete the question before they can finish the survey or quiz. When off, participants will be able to skip the question. By default, this setting will be inactive. - **Numbered**: All question types you add into your project will be automatically numbered to provide a sense of structure. You can [remove these question numbers](/build/quizzes/how-to-remove-question-numbering/) by toggling this switch, which is available to ALL Question Types. If you want to remove numbering from all questions in your survey, you can do this via the survey's settings in the left sidebar. - **Option labels**: Switch the labelling style for answer options (e.g. A, B, C… vs 1, 2, 3…). Available on Multi-Choice and similar option-based question types. - **Link to Contact detail**: Link this question's answer to a field on the respondent's Contact record, so it prefills when known and updates the CRM contact when answered. - **Text rows**: This slider allows you to customize the size of a textbox, and therefore the amount of text a respondent can input. It now defaults to a single row and can be adjusted up to ten rows. Only available with Text questions. - **Prefix / Postfix**: Add fixed text before or after a respondent's answer (for example a currency symbol or unit). Available on Number/Money and similar text-input questions. - **Input limitation**: Control what type of information participants can input into a textbox. You will be able to choose between: - **None**: Respondents will be free to input any kind of information. - **Numeric**: Restricts participants to the use of numeric keys (i.e. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0) - **Email**: Only allows the inputting of email addresses (e.g. example@example.com) - **Web Address**: Compels respondents to insert only web addresses/URLs into textboxes - **Telephone Number**: Restricts input to a phone-number format - **Custom**: Define your own input pattern - **"Other" text choice**: Adds a freeform "Other (Please Specify)" answer option. See [How to Add an Other Answer Option](/build/surveys/other-answer-options/). - **Randomize**: This switch toggles how the order of your answers will be presented to respondents. When 'Off', the answer options will appear in the order you set them. When 'On', the answer order will be randomized for each participant. Only available with Multiple-Choice, Drop Down, Order Ranking, and Picture Choice question types. - [How to Randomize Answer Order](/build/surveys/how-to-randomize-the-answer-order/) - **Multiple selections (Minimum & Maximum)**: Choose the total number of answers that respondents will be able to select for each question. You will be able to set this to any number between one and the maximum amount of answer options you include. Only available with Multiple-Choice and Picture Choice question types. See [Limit the Number of Answers a Respondent can Select](/build/surveys/limit-the-number-of-answers-a-respondent-can-select/). - **Rating Heat Bar**: This switch toggles whether the Heat Bar is included above the numbered scale. This bar is for visual purposes only, to indicate the negative (red) and positive (green) ends of the scale, and cannot be interacted with by respondents. Only available with scaled questions. - **Selection type**: Switch between the Opinion Scale format and the Slider format. - **Range start & range end**: Controls the numbered range for scales and sliders. - **Number of stars**: Adjust this setting to customize the maximum number of stars available to respondents. :::note The old "# of columns" and "Number column headings" (Matrix) settings were not found in the current builder — these appear to have been removed or replaced by responsive, automatic layout. ::: * * * If you encounter any problems with these menus or options, don't hesitate to get in touch with us via the Chat box. Alternatively, you can find our contact information on the Contact Page. --- # A/B Testing (Split Testing) in Surveys https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/split-testing-in-surveys/ Our split testing elements allow you to perform randomized tests of text, images and videos with respondents. The percentage of respondents who were shown each variable will be displayed in your survey report. This feature is useful when testing new product concepts or branding with customers, as you'll be able to filter and compare feedback based on the A/B variables. As mentioned above, there are three elements you can split test in your survey: - Text - Images - Videos Up to 26 variables can be added to a split-testing element. ## A/B Text This element allows you to show different images to different sets of respondents. This text is free-standing but can be followed by a question asking how respondents feel about it. For example, this could be a new tagline for your brand or sales copy for your website. In the builder, the AB Text element shows a placeholder that cycles through your variable letters (A, B, C…) rather than the live content — a note in the builder reminds you of this. If you preview your survey you will see the variable as a respondent would. ### How to split test text 1. Go to the Builder 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Scroll to the **Split Testing** category (or search for "AB") 4. Select **AB Text** to insert it at that point in your survey ## A/B Images Display different images to different sets of respondents. These images stand alone from any questions in your survey but can be followed by a question. In the builder, the AB Image element shows the same cycling placeholder described above. If you preview your survey you will see the variable as a respondent would. ### How to split test images 1. Go to the Builder 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Scroll to the **Split Testing** category (or search for "AB") 4. Select **AB Image** to insert it at that point in your survey ## A/B Videos Display different videos to different sets of respondents. These videos are independent of any other questions, but you can follow the split test videos with a question to ask for respondent reactions. In the builder, the AB Video element shows the same cycling placeholder described above. If you preview your survey you will see the variable as a respondent would. ### How to split test videos 1. Go to the Builder 2. Click **+ Question** 3. Scroll to the **Split Testing** category (or search for "AB") 4. Select **AB Video** to insert it at that point in your survey ## Previewing A/B tests in surveys We'd recommend [previewing your survey](/build/surveys/how-to-preview-and-test-projects/) a few times before sharing it with respondents. Each time you preview your survey, a different variable will be displayed in the split testing field. 1. Go to the Builder 2. Click the **Preview** icon in the topbar 3. Close the preview and click **Preview** again to display a new A/B variable ## Analyzing A/B Test Results There are several areas in the Results section where you can view and analyze the results of your A/B test. - In your survey report, you'll find the percentages for how many times each variable was shown under the AB Test question results - Use **Filter & Compare** in the Results sidebar to filter and compare data sets by your A/B test - Open **Results → Responses** to view what variable each respondent was shown The A/B variables are randomly selected for each new respondent, meaning it's unlikely to see an even split between variables in your results. --- # Survey and Form Settings https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/survey-settings/ We provide a number of settings to improve not only your survey building experience but also participants' completion process. Open a project and select **Settings** in the left-hand toolbar of the builder. Settings are grouped into five collapsible sections — click a section heading to expand it: ![Survey Settings](/help-images/survey-settings/file-CE21kDZnEp.png) - [Appearance](#appearance) - [Privacy & Security](#privacy-security) - [Language](#language) - [Completion & Notifications](#completion-notifications) - [Contact Saving](#contact-saving) ## Appearance **Remove branding**: By default, all projects contain our branding. Enabling this (also called [White label](/build/surveys/white-label-a-project/)) will remove this branding from surveys, quizzes and emails. **Show progress bar**: Show or hide the progress bar at the top of your form, and choose its position style (e.g. Compact). Toggled on by default. **Highlight next question (auto-scroll)**: Automatically scrolls to and highlights the next question to be answered. Toggled on by default. **Automatic Numbering**: Gives questions numbers automatically. Toggled on by default. You can also toggle numbering for individual questions — for more on this see our guide to the [Question Quick Menu](/results/your-quick-report/about-the-quick-report/). ## Privacy & Security **Pseudonymization**: This feature allows you to [separate personally identifiable information (PII)](/build/surveys/pseudonymization/) from survey/quiz/form responses in your results. Allowing for complete anonymity of responses, whilst retaining a list. **Password Protection**: Require participants to enter a password before they can complete your project. Enter your chosen password directly into the Password field in this section — leave it blank if you don't want a password. - [How to Set a Password](/send/sharing-options-and-settings/how-to-set-a-password-for-your-project/) for your project **Prevent Duplicate Responses**: This option limits the number of responses per computer to one, using cookies. Cookies are packets of data sent to a browser by an internet server. Each time that user accesses the same server they are identified or tracked. Preventing duplicate responses will [stop the same respondent from completing your project more than once](/send/sharing-options-and-settings/prevent-multiple-responses-from-the-same-device/), therefore sustaining the integrity of your results. ## Language Built-in survey messages (Next Page, Finish Survey, error and validation text, and so on) now automatically display in the participant's language across 54 languages — no further configuration is required. ## Completion & Notifications **Edit After Completed**: When using the [Tracking feature](/send/sharing-options-and-settings/how-to-enable-tracked-responses/), you can use this setting to allow respondents to edit their responses once they have submitted their completed response. If a participant feels they have made a mistake, provided incorrect information, or have simply changed their opinion concerning a subject, this option is a useful way to sanction some flexibility in changing their answer choices. **Email Notifications**: Receive an instant email notification when a new response is submitted to your form. **Create Inbox Conversation**: Automatically creates a conversation in your Inbox when a response is submitted. Requires a Contact email address question in the form. Toggled on by default. ## Contact Saving Contacts collected from this form can be saved to your contact list automatically — pick one or more Groups to add respondents to. Once in a group, you can email them, pre-fill or update their details, record GDPR consents, and collect e-signatures. To keep a form for responses-only, leave all groups unselected. --- # What are Sub-questions? https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/what-are-sub-questions/ Sub-questions are those that share a similar line of questioning and appear underneath your main question. These include Multi-Factor Scales, Opinion Sliders, Star Ratings, and any other question type where you can add an extra row using an 'Add another…' link beneath the question. **Example: Multi-Factor Scale** Choose the 'Multi-Factor Scale' question type (or add rows to an Opinion Scale question) and use 'Add another scale' to add each extra row: ![Opinion Scale With Sub-Questions](/help-images/what-are-sub-questions/file-S3dJsc9jqF.png) **Example: Multiple Star Rankings** On a Star Rating question, use 'Add another star option' to rate multiple things (e.g. Product quality, Customer service) with the same star scale: ![Star Rating With Sub-Questions](/help-images/what-are-sub-questions/file-MzGsjhPhOV.png) --- # How to White Label a Project https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/white-label-a-project/ By White Labelling a project, you remove all of our branding from your forms, emails and reports. ![Enable White Labelling](/help-images/white-label-a-project/settings-remove-branding.png) 1. Open a project 2. Select the '[Settings](/build/surveys/survey-settings/)' tab in the left sidebar of the builder 3. Expand the 'Appearance' section 4. Switch the toggle button beneath 'Remove branding' All branding will now be removed for this project. --- # Why is My Question Locked? https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/why-is-my-question-locked/ If a question has collected at least one response, a lock icon appears in its toolbar in the builder. Clicking it shows a message confirming the question is locked because responses have been collected: ![Locked Questions](/help-images/why-is-my-question-locked/file-5dpxDUC5du.png) This lock only appears on questions with a fixed list of answer options (Multi-Choice, Dropdown, and similar question types). Questions without discrete options — such as Opinion Scale or Star Rating — don't show this lock, since there's nothing structural to add, remove, or reorder. Questions are locked once they've collected responses for two reasons: **Response Consistency**: Changing question wording or answers whilst a project is live may incur differing answer selections from your respondents. Those who selected answers before the change may have chosen something completely different if the question/answers had originally been written that way, and vice versa. **Protecting your Results**: You can still make cosmetic edits — modifying the question text, images, or certain settings. However, the following changes are not allowed while the question has responses: - Adding options - Deleting options - Changing the order of options - Some settings ![The full locked-question message](/help-images/why-is-my-question-locked/locked-question-modal.png) To make these changes, you must first delete all responses associated with that question. You can do this from the lock message itself using the 'Delete responses' button — note this action cannot be undone. Read more about the [changes you can make to a live project](/build/surveys/editing-live-projects/). --- # Will Deleting Questions Delete Results? https://docs.shout.com/build/surveys/will-deleting-questions-delete-results/ Yes, deleting a question after a project has been launched will remove the data for that question from your results section. When you delete a question that has collected responses, the builder shows a confirmation prompt before removing it: ![Delete question confirmation](/help-images/will-deleting-questions-delete-results/delete-question-confirm.png) :::caution **Note**: This data will be permanently deleted. The confirmation prompt itself warns "This action cannot be undone." ::: --- # Inviting Collaborators to a Project https://docs.shout.com/build/team-collaboration/inviting-collaborators/ Shout no longer has a per-project 'Invite' button — collaboration now works through **Workspaces**. Instead of inviting people to a single Survey, Form, Quiz or Calculator one at a time, you place the project inside a shared Workspace, and everyone with access to that Workspace can view and edit every project inside it. Please note that **you can only add members of your Organization** ([What is an Organization?](/account/organizations/what-is-an-organization/)) to a Workspace, and other members must have accepted the invitation to join your Organization before you can collaborate with them. Sharing a project this way still has the same benefits as before. Firstly, the project you're creating may be a team effort, so this gives seamless access to all concerned parties. Secondly, it allows your project to be reviewed before it's sent out to respondents. ## Inviting Collaborators from the Dashboard 1. On the Forms dashboard, click the project you want to share to reveal its quick actions, then choose **Move to workspace**. 2. Pick an existing Workspace (or click **Create workspace** to make a new one), then click **Move**. ![Move to Workspace dialog](/help-images/inviting-collaborators/move-to-workspace-2026.png) 3. In the left sidebar, click the **⋮** icon next to the Workspace name and select **Members**. ![Workspace context menu showing the Members option](/help-images/inviting-collaborators/workspace-menu-2026.png) 4. Search for an existing team member (or group) to add them, or click **Invite by email** to invite someone who isn't on your team yet — they'll be added to your Organization once they accept, and gain access to the Workspace at the same time. ![Workspace Members dialog with a member selected](/help-images/inviting-collaborators/workspace-members-dialog-2026.png) Some Workspaces are set so that **all team members automatically have access** (you'll see a banner saying so in the Members dialog); others restrict access to specific people, added individually. Toggle **Manager** on a member to let them add and remove other Workspace members themselves. **Note**: To remove a collaborator, open the Workspace's **Members** panel and select them — a **Remove from workspace** button appears for anyone who was added individually. If the Workspace instead grants access to all team members automatically, remove them from your Organization's Team (Account > Team) to revoke their access. ## Reviewing a Project from Inside It The '+' button that used to sit in a project's top bar is gone — sharing now happens from the dashboard (above), and once a colleague has access to a project's Workspace, they can open it directly from their own dashboard too. If you just want a colleague to proofread a project rather than have full edit access, open the project and select **Comments** in the left-hand toolbar. Anyone with access to the project can leave feedback there without editing the form itself, which covers the same "review before sending" use case this article originally described. --- # About the Image Library https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/about-the-image-library/ There are two ways that images can be used to enhance your project. Firstly, they are utilized by Picture Choice questions as answer options. Secondly, you are able to insert images as a [Content Item](/build/text-images-and-video/list-of-presentational-items/) (an Image item). The latter cannot be interacted with by respondents, and are used to provide additional information or improve the visual design of your project. The Image Library stores any photos you've uploaded to the site, plus a searchable library of free stock photos. It can be opened from any element that uses an image — click 'Choose Image' on an Image item, or the camera icon on a Picture Choice/Picture Comments answer option. The elements that contain images include: ### Picture Choice Question Types - [Picture Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/picture-choice-single-select/) - [Picture Choice (Multi-Select)](/build/questions/picture-choice-multi-select/) - [Picture Comments](/build/questions/picture-comments/) **Note**: In the question picker these are grouped under 'Picture Choices'. Adding a 'Picture Choice' question creates a single-select question by default — switch it to multi-select from the 'Item / Question type' dropdown above the question if you need multiple answers selectable. ### Content Items - [Image](/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-images/) ## To Open the Image Library 1. Insert an Image item, or a Picture Choice/Picture Comments question 2. Click the 'Choose Image' button (or the camera icon on an answer option) ![](/help-images/about-the-image-library/image-library-tabs.png) ## To Upload a New Image to your Library 1. In the Image Library, switch to the 'Upload / My Gallery' tab 2. Click 'Browse for Files' (or drag and drop a file onto the panel) 3. Select a file from your personal system **Note**: The Library also has a 'Photo' tab with a searchable collection of free stock photos, if you don't have your own image to hand — this isn't available when choosing a logo, only for images used inside your project. ## To Insert Images into your Project 1. Open the 'Upload / My Gallery' tab and click one of your previously uploaded images **Note**: This will place the image where the image element field was previously. ## To Delete Images from your Image Library 1. Open the Image Library and switch to the 'Upload / My Gallery' tab 2. Hover over the image you want to delete 3. Click the delete (bin) icon that appears in its corner 4. Confirm on the warning that appears **Note**: Deleting an image removes it everywhere it's used — the app explicitly warns "Deleting image will delete it from ALL FORMS it is used in. This action cannot be undone." --- # Add a Link to Your Logo https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/add-a-link-to-your-logo/ When adding your logo to a project, you can also embed a link which respondents are taken to when your logo is clicked. To embed a link in your logo: 1. Go to the Build section of your project 2. Click your logo 3. Paste your link into the URL field (labelled: "On click go to web address") ![](/help-images/add-a-link-to-your-logo/file-omE2XYIyPy.png) 4. Optionally, click 'Test Link' (which appears once a URL is entered) to open it and check it's correct Now, whenever your logo is clicked, respondents will be taken to that URL in a new tab. --- # Adding and Editing Logos https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/adding-and-editing-logos/ You may want to add some branding to a project, which can be done by inserting a logo. You can also attach a web address to a logo, sending respondents who click it to a website or your choice. ## To Add a Logo ![Add Logo](/help-images/adding-and-editing-logos/file-Pq2ROuzTrk.png) 1. Open a project 2. Click the ‘Add Logo’ button beneath the page title 3. Choose an image from the [Library](/build/text-images-and-video/about-the-image-library/) ## Add a Link to the Logo ![Add Link To Logo](/help-images/adding-and-editing-logos/file-aIuo8QzLnR.png) 1. Click your logo to open the logo editor 2. Insert a URL into the available field **Note**: Whenever a respondent clicks your logo, they will be redirected to the website you linked. Once you've entered a URL, a 'Test Link' button appears so you can check it opens the right page. To remove this link, simply click the logo again and delete the URL from the box. ## To Change a Logo ![Change Logo](/help-images/adding-and-editing-logos/file-nbZ8n15T8l.png) 1. Click your logo 2. Click the ‘Change’ button in the logo editor 3. Choose another image from the Library ## To Remove a Logo ![Remove Logo](/help-images/adding-and-editing-logos/file-fgq5rCIcyh.png) 1. Click the logo you currently have inserted 2. Press ‘Remove’ **Note**: This will remove the logo from your project, but it will still be present in your Image Library. --- # Background Image File Size https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/background-image-file-size/ All background images are resized to 1500 width x 1500 height. So, an image that fits this scale or larger should have the best resolution for your background. Please note that the maximum file size is 5MB, anything larger than this will not be uploaded. --- # How to Change Your Logo https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/change-your-logo/ ![How To Change Your Logo](/help-images/change-your-logo/file-lUIi1qampJ.png) You may have select the wrong logo to be used in your form, but there's a simply solution for that. To quickly change your logo to another you've upload (or upload a new one): 1. Go to the Build section of your project 2. Click your logo 3. Select Change![](/help-images/change-your-logo/file-zaayszMhm4.png) This will open the image library, from where you can select a new image or upload a new one from your system. --- # Formatting Text https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/formatting-text/ Text formatting can be applied to questions, text fields, and page descriptions in surveys, quizzes, and forms. ## How to Access the Text Formatting Menu? The text formatting menu will appear when you **highlight a section of text** in a question, paragraph, or heading field. ![](/help-images/formatting-text/file-7jmdxinmtY.png) From here you will be presented with a list of text formatting options, which are discussed further below. ## Text Formatting Menu Options Below is the complete list of text formatting options available to you. These options include both aesthetic and functional settings: - Bold - Italics - Bulleted list - Numbered list - Insert Dynamic Text - Link ### Bold: This typeface formats text with darker, heavier strokes than usual. It can be used when you want to emphasise the importance of a point or sentence. ### Italics: Text enriched with this style will format characters to slant upwards and to the right. This is used to distinguish certain words from others within the same piece of text. ### Bulleted list / Numbered list: Turn the selected line(s) into a bulleted or numbered list — useful for breaking up instructions or a set of criteria within a question or page description. ### Link: Clicking the link icon opens a small URL field with a checkmark to confirm and an 'X' to cancel. - **Insert Link**: Highlight the text you want to link, click the link icon, then type or paste the address and confirm. To create a new line of text and embed your link within that, place your cursor on a new line before opening the link field. - **Remove a link**: Highlight the linked text, click the link icon again, clear the address, and confirm. This option is only relevant once you've inserted a link into the field. See our [how to insert a link](/build/surveys/how-to-insert-a-link/) article for more detail. ### Insert Dynamic Text: This is the current name for what used to be called 'Pipe Text From'. Use this feature to pull text from another source into your current field, personalising questions for respondents. Click the `{}` icon in the formatting menu to open the 'Insert Dynamic Text' dialog, which offers three data sources: ![](/help-images/formatting-text/insert-dynamic-text-dialog.png) - **Contact details**: If you've imported Contacts to the app, pull in [custom fields](/contacts/managing-contacts/manage-custom-fields/) held on the contact record. - **Previous answers**: Pull text from an answer a respondent has already given earlier in the same project. - **External data**: Use Querystring or JavaScript API to source data passed in as Hidden Fields. Head over to our [Text Piping](/build/logic-and-answer-piping/text-piping/) article for more information on this feature. **Note**: Inserting an image between fields is no longer done from this menu — add an [Image](/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-images/) item to your page instead. --- # How to Insert a Video https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-a-video/ This item will allow you to include a Vimeo or Youtube video in your project. Videos can be used to provide further information to respondents; concerning individual questions, or even the project aims and outline. ![Video Field](/help-images/how-to-insert-a-video/video-url-dialog.png) ## Inserting a Video ![](/help-images/how-to-insert-a-video/file-Jxsr7EYlcz.png) 1. Go to the Builder 2. Open the Form tab 3. Click 'Question' to open the question picker 4. Select Video, under 'Content Items' 5. Click the box that says 'Provide a video link, youtube or vimeo.' 6. In the 'Video' dialog that appears, paste the video URL into the 'Video URL' field and click 'Done' Once you've done this, your video will appear embedded in your project. **Note**: Videos will play inside your project, and will not direct respondents to a new tab or web page. ## Removing a Video Videos no longer show an inline URL field with an 'X' once they've been set. To remove a video, click the '⋮' (more options) icon on the video question — either in the left-hand question list or on the item itself — and choose 'Delete'. This removes the whole video item; add a new Video item if you want to add a different video afterwards. --- # How to Insert Images https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-images/ There are two ways that images can be used to enhance your project. Firstly, they are utilized by the Picture Choice Questions as answer options. Secondly, you are able to insert images as a [Content Item](/build/text-images-and-video/list-of-presentational-items/). ![Image Field](/help-images/how-to-insert-images/image-item-choose-image.png) The latter cannot be interacted with by respondents, and are used to provide additional information or improve the visual design of your project. ## The Image Library The [Image Library](/build/text-images-and-video/about-the-image-library/) stores any photos you've uploaded to the site, and also lets you search a library of free stock photos. It can be opened by inserting an Image item into your project and clicking 'Choose Image'. The elements that contain images include: ### Picture Choice Question Types - [Picture Choice (Single Select)](/build/questions/picture-choice-single-select/) - [Picture Choice (Multi-Select)](/build/questions/picture-choice-multi-select/) - [Picture Comments](/build/questions/picture-comments/) ### Content Items - Image ## How to add images to surveys, forms, and quizzes ![](/help-images/how-to-insert-images/file-vEHaghJ545.png) 1. Open the Form tab 2. Click 'Question' to open the question picker, then select Image under 'Content Items' 3. Click the 'Choose Image' button in the builder 4. Select an image from your Image Library, or search the 'Photo' tab for a free stock photo **Note**: This will place the image where the image element field was previously. ### How to upload new images to the Image Library 1. Insert an image element into your project (steps 1 and 2 above) 2. Click 'Choose Image' (this will open the Image Library) 3. Switch to the 'Upload / My Gallery' tab 4. Click 'Browse for Files' (or drag and drop a file onto the panel) 5. Select a file from your device ### Replacing an Image You can easily replace an image in your project. To do so, simply click the image in your project and the Image Library will reopen. From here, follow the same process for inserting an image. ## To Delete Images from your Image Library 1. Open the Image Library and switch to the 'Upload / My Gallery' tab 2. Hover over the image you want to delete 3. Click the delete (bin) icon that appears in its corner 4. Confirm on the warning that appears **Note**: Deleting an image removes it everywhere it's used — the app explicitly warns "Deleting image will delete it from ALL FORMS it is used in. This action cannot be undone." --- # How to Insert Text https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-text/ ![](/help-images/how-to-insert-text/file-rQbEIs1bt5.jpg) Provide a deeper level of information, or context, for respondents by inserting additional text boxes into your project. This is done by incorporating the ‘Paragraph’ [Content Item](/build/text-images-and-video/list-of-presentational-items/) into your survey, form, or quiz, and filling it with text. ## How to add text to a survey, form, or quiz ![Add Question panel showing the Content Items group, including Paragraph](/help-images/how-to-insert-text/add-question-content-items.png) 1. Go to the Builder 2. Open the Form tab in the left sidebar 3. Click '+ Question' 4. Select 'Paragraph' under Content Items ## Formatting Text There are a few ways you can customize the text inside your new text box. Click into the item and highlight a section of text to reveal the formatting toolbar. ![Formatting toolbar shown above a selected line of text, with Bold, Italic, Bullet list, Numbered list, Insert variable and Link options](/help-images/how-to-insert-text/paragraph-formatting-toolbar.png) - **Bold**: Apply darker, heavier, strokes to text characters. - **Italic**: Slant text upwards, and to the right. - **Bullet list** / **Numbered list**: Turn the selected lines into a list. - **Insert variable**: Pipe a contact field or previous answer into the text (this replaces the old ‘Pipe Text From’ option). - **Link**: Attach a hyperlink to text. To insert an image or video alongside your text, use the **Add image** / **Add video** icons shown above the item when it's selected — these add the picture or clip as its own block rather than as inline text formatting. For more information on this, please visit our [Formatting Text](/build/text-images-and-video/formatting-text/) article. --- # List of Presentational Items https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/list-of-presentational-items/ ## What are Presentational Items? There is a range of presentational items — grouped in the Builder as **Content Items** — that can be implemented in your project. These include: - Heading / Greeting - [Paragraph](/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-text/) (previously called ‘Text’) - [Image](/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-images/) - [Video](/build/text-images-and-video/how-to-insert-a-video/) - Restart Form Button (grouped under ‘Special’ rather than ‘Content Items’) Each of these elements fulfils a different purpose, but all improve the organizational aspects of your project. ## How to insert a Presentational Item 1. Open your project in the Builder 2. Click ‘+ Question’ (at the top of a page in the left‑hand panel, or from the canvas) 3. Find the item you want — Heading / Greeting, Paragraph, Image and Video are listed under **Content Items**; Restart Form Button is listed under **Special**. You can also type into the Search box at the top of the panel to jump straight to it. 4. Click the item to add it to your page ### Heading / Greeting ![Heading / Greeting item, showing the heading and optional description fields](/help-images/list-of-presentational-items/heading-item.png) This item inserts a heading (and an optional description underneath) into your project. It can be used to break up your project or to signal to respondents that there will be a change in the line of questioning. It's also what's used for the welcome message shown at the start of a project — see our [Welcome Message](/build/text-images-and-video/welcome-message/) article for more on that. It may also be necessary for users with free accounts to employ this item, as you will only be able to include one Page in your project. Therefore, this will be the best way to split your project into smaller sections. ### Paragraph ![Paragraph item showing example text](/help-images/list-of-presentational-items/file-rQbEIs1bt5.jpg)If you need to provide respondents with some information, this presentational item (called ‘Paragraph’, formerly ‘Text’) will allow you to insert a chunk of text into your project. These are useful in instances where you are required to provide a disclaimer or project description to your respondents. Similarly, you could provide longer descriptions or requirements for individual questions. ### Image ![Image item in its empty state, showing the Choose Image button](/help-images/list-of-presentational-items/image-choose-image.png)Click ‘Choose Image’ and either search free stock photos, upload a picture from your device, or pick one you've already used from My Gallery, then place it in your project. Images could be used as part of the question and answer process, or simply to improve the visual aspects of your Survey, Form, or Quiz. ### Video ![Dialog for entering a Vimeo or YouTube video URL](/help-images/list-of-presentational-items/video-url-dialog.png)This element places a video box into your project. Click the box and a dialog will ask you to enter a URL from YouTube or Vimeo — paste the video's link there and click Done, and respondents will be able to view the linked video when completing your project. These can be used to provide more information on questions, or even be used as the questions themselves. **Note**: Too many videos may dissuade participants from completing your project, as they can be mentally taxing. ### Restart Form Button ![Restart Form Button](/help-images/list-of-presentational-items/restart-form-button.png)Insert the ‘Restart Form Button’ to provide respondents with a way of returning to the beginning of your project. They may want to do this if they feel they’ve made a mistake, or regret choosing an answer option. In the Builder this item now lives under the ‘Special’ group rather than alongside the other content items. You are able to include one per page or one at the end of your project. --- # How to Remove a Logo https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/remove-a-logo/ ![How To Remove A Logo](/help-images/remove-a-logo/change-logo-builder.png)You may have added a logo to your project, and realised you've used the wrong version or the fit isn't quite right. But not to worry, you can easily remove logos from your projects by: 1. Go to the Build section of your project 2. Click your logo 3. Select Remove![](/help-images/remove-a-logo/change-logo-popover.png) This will remove your logo. --- # Welcome Message https://docs.shout.com/build/text-images-and-video/welcome-message/ Every page in your survey, form or quiz has its own title at the top, and you can greet your respondents or provide any relevant information they may need before starting by adding a ‘Heading / Greeting’ item to your first page — this is the item people usually mean by a ‘welcome section’. ![Heading / Greeting item, showing the heading and optional description fields](/help-images/welcome-message/heading-greeting-item.png) This item acts like any other question or content item in your survey. You can add text to both the heading and description fields, insert hyperlinks and add emojis to really make this section your own. ## How to add a welcome section 1. Open the Form tab in the left sidebar 2. Click '+ Question' 3. Select 'Heading / Greeting' under Content Items You can then move this to its own page or section. ## How to remove a welcome section You can remove the welcome message the same way you would delete any other question in your survey or quiz, by: 1. Open the **Form** tab in the left sidebar 2. Click the drag-handle icon (⋮⋮) to the left of the item you'd like to delete — this opens the item's menu 3. Select **Delete** This action can't be undone, so make sure you're completely sure about this choice before hitting that delete button. --- # Customizing Theme Designs https://docs.shout.com/build/themes/customizing-themes/ This feature allows you to change the visual design of your form. You can access the Theme menu from the sidebar of the form builder. 1. Open a form in the builder (or create a new one). 2. Click ‘Theme’ in the left-hand sidebar (between Form and Settings). 3. Use the **Theme type** dropdown to browse our different theme styles — Modern (Recommended), Seasonal (Mixed), Letter (A4), Letter (Top spaced), Bordered, and Hero Header — then click a theme card in the list below to apply it. ## Customizing Theme Colors and Fonts It's important to note that different themes may have different elements that can be customized. So, it's would be worth checking out all the theme templates we have to offer before making a final choice. ![](/help-images/customizing-themes/file-jjVKiA029h.png) ### Changing colors ![Changing Theme Colors](/help-images/customizing-themes/file-iSDmcK9ex5.png) 1. Click ‘Theme’ in the sidebar. 2. Make sure the theme you want to edit is selected (it has a highlighted border). 3. Below the theme's preview thumbnail there's a row of color swatches — hover one to see its label (e.g. **Background Color**, **Question Highlight Color**; the exact set depends on the theme) — and a font box (**Aa**). Click a swatch and a color panel opens underneath. 4. Manually use the color wheel to select a color, enter a HEX code in the text field, or click the eyedropper icon to pick a color from elsewhere on screen. ![](/help-images/customizing-themes/file-wGhvMe2iEu.png) ### Switching Fonts ![](/help-images/customizing-themes/file-Kcpj64JRiA.png) 1. Click 'Theme' in the sidebar 2. Select a Theme 3. Click the font box (the **Aa** swatch) 4. Select a font from the list in the Font picker 5. Click **Done** to apply it ## Selecting Background Images ![The Background Image picker, showing the Photo tab with a Pexels search box and thumbnail results, and an Upload / My Gallery tab.](/help-images/customizing-themes/background-image-picker.png) Click **Background Image** below your active theme to open the image picker. Choose a photo from the built-in Pexels library on the **Photo** tab, or switch to **Upload / My Gallery** to use your own image — selecting one applies it immediately. Once a background image is set, a **Transparency** slider appears so you can fade it, and a small **X** next to the Background Image button lets you remove it. ## Can you Apply Different Themes to Separate Pages? Unfortunately, we do not support the capability to do this. Any Theme you choose is applied to your entire form. ## Changing a Theme To apply a different Theme, simply follow the same process as applying a theme. If you already have one set, it will simply change to the new selection. If you've customized a Theme's colors, fonts, or background image and then click a different theme card, you'll see a confirmation dialog — **"You will lose font and color changes"** — warning that changing the theme will delete the font and color changes you've made. Click **Ok** to continue or **Cancel** to keep your current theme. In practice, your background image is lost too. You will not be able to recover your previous settings without redoing them from scratch, so it's worth noting down any custom HEX codes first if you might want to switch back. (This warning only appears if the active theme actually has customizations to lose — browsing theme styles with the **Theme type** dropdown, or picking a theme you haven't customized, won't prompt you.) --- # How to Reset Theme Customization https://docs.shout.com/build/themes/how-to-reset-theme-customization/ To reset your customization back to the default template: 1. Click **Theme** in the left sidebar of the form builder. 2. Click a different theme card (any theme other than the one you've customized). 3. A dialog appears — **"You will lose font and color changes"** — confirm by clicking **Ok**. (If you haven't customized the current theme, no dialog appears and it switches immediately.) 4. Click back on the theme you originally wanted to use. Since it now has no customization to lose, it reapplies with its clean, default settings and no further confirmation is needed. **Note**: Changing themes will only affect colors, background images, title size and fonts. **All your content will be safe when changing themes**. --- # How to Print a Survey https://docs.shout.com/send/printing-and-exporting/how-to-print-a-project/ Whether you want a paper copy of your form in order to distribute it by hand or to copy-proof the document in a format that suits you better, we give you the ability to print your form or save it as a PDF straight from the Builder. 1. Open your form and go to the **Build** tab 2. Click the **•••** (more options) menu in the top right corner, next to the Publish/status button 3. Select **Print / PDF** ![Print / PDF option in the form's more options menu](/help-images/how-to-print-a-project/print-pdf-menu-option.png) A "Printing" dialog opens with a preview of your form laid out for print. It will briefly show "Please wait. Preparing for print" and then switch to "Ready". ![The Printing dialog showing a Ready preview with a Print button](/help-images/how-to-print-a-project/printing-dialog-preview.png) 4. Once it says "Ready", click **Print** 5. Your browser's print dialog will open — choose a physical printer to print a paper copy, or choose "Save as PDF" (or "Microsoft Print to PDF" on Windows) as the destination to export a PDF file instead 6. Click **Close** to dismiss the Printing dialog when you're done **Note**: Unlike in previous versions, you don't need to publish or close your form first — Print / PDF is available for forms in Draft, Collecting (published), and Closed states. --- # Using a custom domain in your survey link https://docs.shout.com/send/sending-a-project/custom-domain/ By default, your survey link will include our domain name. Our custom domain feature allows you to replace our domain with your website domain. E.g. **Ourdomain.com/s/surveycode** \--> **customdomain.com/s/surveycode** This feature will not change the survey code in the URL slug, but you can use the custom survey link feature to do this. This is very easy to set up and works great with [white labelling](/build/surveys/white-label-a-project/). Using all three, you can hide all traces of our branding. **Note**: You will need technical knowledge of your website/server to implement this. We achieve the custom domain feature using ‘domain cloaking’ which is a file that can be placed on your server that will display the surveys on our platform seamlessly through an iFrame. This allows the domain in the address bar to remain as your own. ## How to use a custom domain 1. Go to the **Send** section of your survey/ quiz. 2. In the **Get a link (URL)** panel, you'll see three buttons: **Use custom domain**, **Customize URL**, and **Get custom domain script**. 3. Click **Get custom domain script** — this immediately downloads a small `index.html` file. This is the cloaking file. 4. Upload this HTML file into the desired folder on your website's server. It will not need to be touched again. 5. Click **Use custom domain** to open the **Custom domain configuration** dialog. ![Custom domain configuration dialog](/help-images/custom-domain/custom-domain-dialog.png) 6. Enter your domain address including the subfolder you uploaded the file to (e.g. `https://example.com/s`), then click **Save**. For example, if the folder is called ‘surveys’, the address would read like below: http://yourdomain.com/surveys The link for all surveys on the launch page and emails sent will contain your domain. --- # Embedding a Project https://docs.shout.com/send/sending-a-project/embedding-a-project/ Embedding allows respondents to complete your survey, quiz or form without leaving your website. In this article, we'll help you embed surveys on your website, and go over having your project appear as a popup or slideout on the click of a button. ![](/help-images/embedding-a-project/file-AwH7dSoply.png) ## Embedding a form on your website An inline embedded form will make the form appear part of your page’s content. ![Embed A Survey On Your Website](/help-images/embedding-a-project/file-qP5fj97TUF.png) To find and use the code to embed your project, follow these steps: 1. Go to the Send section of your form 2. Scroll to Inline Embed 3. Click **Get the code** 4. Copy the code 5. Paste this onto your web page The Embed Placeholder
code should be placed where it is desired for the form to appear in the page’s content. :::note If you're using a Content Management System like WordPress or Wix, you'll need to place a HTML element onto the page, and paste the embed script into this. ::: ### ![Embedding A Form On Wordpress Or Wix](/help-images/embedding-a-project/file-MIfzQffgES.png) ### Dynamic Content / Single Page applications When using the inline embed, the form will be loaded into the placeholder when the page is ready. If your placeholder `
` is added to the page after that (e.g. dynamically loaded content, or a single-page application route change), a blanket rescan of the page is not currently exposed on the `ShoutEmbed` object. Instead, create the embed directly for the new element using the [JavaScript API](/send/sending-a-project/javascript-api/): ```js ShoutEmbed.ready(function () { ShoutEmbed.api.inline({ formId: "###", appendTo: "survey-placeholder" }); }); ``` Call this once your new placeholder element exists in the DOM. ### Styling Colors and other design elements are controlled via the Builder. Next to the code on the Inline Embed panel there's a **Height** dropdown, set to **Auto** by default. Switch it to **Fixed** to set an exact pixel height for the embed: ![Set Display Height For Embed Forms](/help-images/embedding-a-project/file-436NkZhskR.png) This will change the embed script (adding a `data-sh-height` attribute), so be sure to copy and paste it again if you edit this setting. ### JavaScript API If the standard embed button codes or placeholder codes do not suit your needs, you could use the [JavaScript API](/send/sending-a-project/javascript-api/). ## Slideout & Popout A slideout form will appear over the top of your website sliding from either the left or the right of the page (whichever you choose). On mobile phones, the form will fill the screen. Popouts will have the appearance of a window over your website. ### The Button You can choose how to style the button using our button style selector which is on the Send page — set the background color, font color, font size, corner roundness, and button text, with a live preview before you copy the code. If you prefer, this could instead be done using your own CSS. When clicked, this will trigger the form to open. ### Using the code For all embed types, there are two separate codes required to make the embed work. First, you will need to include